A REPORTE OF THE KING­dome of CONGO, a Re­gion of AFRICA. And of the Countries that border rounde about the same.

  • 1. Wherein is also shewed that the two Zones, Torrida & Frigida, are not onely habitable, but inhabited, and very temperate, contrary to the opinion of the olde Philosophers.
  • 2. That the blacke colour which is in the skinnes of the Ethiopians & Negroes &c. proceedeth not from the Sunne.
  • 3. And that the Riuer Nilus springeth not out of the mountains of the Moone, as hath beene heretofore beleeued: Together with the true cause of the rysing and increase thereof.
  • 4. Besides the description of diuers plantes, Fishes and Beastes, that are founde in those Countries.

Drawen out of the writinges and discourses of Odoardo Lopes a Portingall, by Philippo Pigafetta.

Translated out of Italian by Abraham Hartwell.

LONDON Printed by Iohn Wolfe. 1597.

[...]
[...]

[Page]

[figure]

To the most Gracious and Reuerende Father in God, IOHN by the proui­dence of God, Lord Archbishop of Can­terbury, Primate and Metropolitane of all Englande, and one of the Lordes of her Maiesties most hono­rable Priuie Coun­cell.

MOst Reuerend Father, my singular good and gracious Lorde: In all humble dutie I do offer to your grace this poor and slender present, in auspicium nas­centis anni, which I doe most hartely pray, may bee as happie and prospe­rous both for your health and quiet [Page] gouernement, as (thanks be to God) your latter yeares haue beene. It is a description of a certaine Region or Kingdome in Africa, called Congo, whose name is as yet scarce knowen to our quarters of Europe, neyther is there any great or solemne mention of it in any bookes that haue beene published of that Third parte of the old World. And because this treatise doeth comprehend not onely the na­ture and disposition of the Moci-Conghi, which are the naturall inha­bitantes and people of Congo, toge­ther with all the commodities and trafficke of that Countrey, very fitte and pleasaunt to be reade, but also the religion which they professed, and by what meanes it pleased God to draw them from Paganisme to Chri­stianity: [Page] I thought good thus to make it knowen to my countreymen of England, to the end it might be a pre­sident for such valiant English, as do earnestly thirst and desire to atchieue the conquest of rude and barbarous Nations, that they doo not attempt those actions for commodity of Gold and Siluer, and for other transitorie or worldly respectes, but that they woulde first seeke the Kingdome of God, & the saluation of many thou­sand soules, which the common ene­mie of mankinde still detayneth in ignorance: and then all other thinges shall be put in their mouthes aboun­dantly, as may bee seene by the Por­tingalles in this narration. Written it was by one Philippo Pigafetta, an Ita­lian, and a very good Mathematici­an, [Page] from the mouth of one Lopez a Portingal, together with two maps, the one particular of Congo, the other generall of all Africa, and especially of the Westerne Coast, from 34. de­grees beyond the Aequinoctial north­wardes, downe along to the Cape of Good-Hope in the South, and so vp­wardes againe on the Easterne Coast by the great Island of Madagascar, o­therwise called the Isle of S. Laurence, til you come to the Isle of Socotora, & then to the Redde Sea, and from Ae­gypt into the Inland Southwards to the Empire of Presbiter-Iohn. I beseech your grace to accept of this my poore trauell, and I will not cease to pray to Almightie God, according to my dutie, that hee will multiply many good years vpon you, vnder the hap­py [Page] gouernment of our most gracious & soueraigne Lady Queene Eliza­beth: wherevnto the Church of Eng­lande is bound to say, Amen. From your Graces house in Lambehith, the first of Ianuarie. 1597.

Your Graces most humble Seruant at commaundement, Abraham Hartwell.

❧ The Translator to the Reader.

I Finde it true, that Sophocles writeth in his Whipp-bearer Aiax, [...]: Labor labori laborem adfert, that is to say, Labour doth breede labour vpon labour. For after that the translation of the Booke, contayning the Warres betweene the Turkes and Persians written by Iohn-Thomas Minadoi was published, diuers of my friends haue earnestly moued me to be still doing somewhat, and to help our English Nation, that they might knowe and vnderstand many things, which are common in other languages, but vtterly concealed from this poore Island. I haue aunswered some of these my friends to their good satisfaction, and told them, that the weakenesse of my body would not suffer me to sit long, that the houres of my leasure were not many, vnlesse I should vnduetifully de­fraude those to whome I am most beholden and bounden, of that duty and attendance which I owe vnto them: and lastly, that I had no great pleasure to learne or informe my selfe of the state of other Nations, because I do not as yet suf­ficiently know the Estate of mine owne Countrey. Whereof (I am verily perswaded) I may iustly auouch that which V­lysses protested of his Ithaca: [...]. Then which poore Countrey can I neuer see any sweeter. Among others that made [Page] these Motions vnto me,M. R. Hack­luyt. one there was, who being a curious and a diligent searcher and obseruer of Forreine aduentures and aduenturers, as by his good paines appeareth, came vnto me to the house of a graue and learned Prelate in Suffolke, M. H. Castel­ton. where I lay in my returne out of Norffolke, and there made the like request vnto me, and I the like answere vnto him. But it would not satisfie him: for he sayd it was an answere answerelesse, and it should not serue my turne. And presently presented me with this Portingall Pilgrime lately come to him out of the Kingdome of Congo, and apparrelled in an Italian vesture: intreating me very earnestly, that I would take him with me, and make him English: for he could re­port many pleasant matters that he sawe in his pilgrimage, which are indeed vncouth and almost incredible to this part of Europe. When I sawe there was no remedie, I yeelded, and euen (as the Poet saith) [...],Homer. I brought him away with mee. But within two houres conference, I found him nibling at two most honourable Gentlemen of England, whome in plaine tearmes he called Pirates: so that I had much adoo to hold my hands from renting of him into many mo peeces, then his Cosen Lopez the Doctor was quartered. Yet [...], My second wits stayed me, and aduised me, that I should peruse all his Report, before I would proceede to execution: which in deede I did. And, because I sawe that in all the rest of his behauiour hee conteyned himselfe very well and honestly, and that he vsed this lewd speech, not altogether exanimo, but rather ex vi­tio gentis, of the now-inueterate hatred, which the Span­yard and Portingall beare against our Nation, I was so bold as to pardon him, and so taught him to speake the Eng­lish toung. In which language, if you will vouchsafe to heare him, hee will tell you many notable obseruations of diuers [Page] Countreys and peoples inhabiting in Africa, whose Names haue scarse been mentioned in England. As namely, the Kingdome of Congo, with all the Prouinces thereof, the Kingdome of Angola, the Kingdome of Loango, the Kingdome of the Anzichi, the Kingdome of Mata­ma, the Kingdome of Buttua, the Kingdome of Sofala, the Kingdome of Mozambiche, the Kingdome of Qui­loa, the Kingdome of Mombaza, the Kingdome of Me­linde, with the three great Empyres of Monomotapa, of Moenemugi, and of Prete-Gianni. He will tell you the seuerall Rites and Customes, the Climates and Tem­peratures, the Commodities and Traffiques, of all these Kingdomes. He will tell you the sundry kinds of Cattell, Fishes and Fowles, strange Beasts, and Monstrous Ser­pents, that are to be found therein: For Africa was alwayes noted to be a fruitfull Mother of such fearefull and terrible Creatures. He will tell you of great Lakes, that deserue the name of Seas: and huge Mountaynes of diuers sorts, as for example, Mountaines scorched with heat, Mountaines of Snow proceeding of colde, Mountaynes of the Sunne, Mountaynes of the Moone, Mountaynes of Christall, Mountaynes of Iron, Mountaynes of Siluer, and Moun­taynes of Golde. And lastly, he will tell you the Originall Spring of Nilus, and the true cause of the yerely increase thereof. In any of these poynts, if his Mouth shall happen to runne ouer (as I hope, much it doth not) you must needes beare with him, for he will challenge the priuilege of the English Prouerbe, A Traueller may lye by authoritie, and the old Greeke Agnomination, [...], Euery Pilgrime is not a Sooth-sayer.

But to leaue this long Allegorie, which indeede is meant of this Booke, and to come seriously and briefly to certaine [Page] faults, that some Readers may peraduenture finde therein, I will do my best indeuor to satisfie them in such obiections as may be made. And first, they will except perhaps against the Methode of the Author, because he keepeth no continuate Order in this Report, but leapeth from one Matter to ano­ther, without any coherence, like Marots Poeme, called Du Coqual' Asne: and so maketh a Hotchpot of it. But herein Pigafetta is not greatly to be blamed, who gathering this Report out of the tumultuarie Papers of Lopez, and from his vnpremeditated speeches, vttered by mouth at seuerall times, could not so well reduce it into so exact a forme and Methode, as curious wits do require. He is rather to be com­mended, that hauing so rude and vndigested a Chaos to worke vpon, he could frame so handsome a little world of it as this is. If happily it be further vrged, that the Translator should haue taken paines to cast him in a new Mould, and to make his members hang proportionably one vpon another: I must answere, that I neither do, nor euer did like of that kinde of course. I was alwayes of this opinion (and therein I do still dwell) that Authors should be published in the same Order, in the same Termes, & in the same Stile which they themselues vsed. For how know I, what moued them to ob­serue this Order or that Order, and to make choyce of one word rather then of another? peraduenture the reason of their so doing might proue to be so strong, as I doubt it would not easily be ouerthrowne.Style. And touching Style, some are so scrupulous and so nice, that they cannot abide to haue old and auncient Writers to be published in Latin, vnlesse they do imitate one of the Triumuiri of the Latin toung, Cicero, Caesar or Salust. If all men should be of that humour, we should be bereaued both of singular Diuinitie, and antique Historie, which haue been written by men of no great lear­ning, [Page] as Monkes and Friers, whome (though they were very simple and meane, yet) it pleased God in the times of ignorance, to vse as meanes to preserue vnto vs those Mo­numents of Antiquitie. And therefore I could wish, that they might be published in their owne Style, and (as it were) in Puris Naturalibus, yea though they write false Latin, as some of them do. On the other side, some of our Critikes are so Criticall and so audacious, that when they publish any of the foresayd Triumuiri, or any other Classicall Author, they will transpose, and omit, and foyst into the Text many words and many conceytes, whereof the Author neuer dreamed, as Eustathius and Seruius haue done vpon Ho­mer and Virgill. But if algates some Enthusiasme haue come vpon our Critikes, that hath reuealed vnto them tan­quam ex antro Trophonij, the certaintie of the Authors writing and meaning, to be such as they haue confidently set downe, let me be bold to intreate them, that they would muster their conceytes in the Margine (if the Margine will hold them: as I doubt it will not in this Hypercriticall world) or else that they would reiect them (as some of them haue done) to the later end of their publications, vnder the title of Corrections, Castigations, Emendations, Animaduer­sions, Variae Lectiones, or such like, Vt suo quisque v­tatur iudicio & sensu abundet, That euery man may vse his owne iudgment, and abound in his owne sense. But Male­dicta Glossa quae corrumpit Textum. Cursed be that Glosse that corrupteth the Text. And sory I am, that some of our later Diuines haue erred in this point, euen in translating the Holy Scripture.

Another exception may be taken against the Paradoxes that are maintayned in this Treatise, As namely, contrary to the opinion of the old world, and of the auncient Philoso­phers, [Page] That the two Zones, Torrida, and Frigida, are both habitable and inhabited. But hereunto if the Au­thors reasons here alleaged do not sufficiently answere, I do referre them, that will not yeeld therein, to the excellent Treatise of Iosephus a-Costa, de Natura Noui Orbis, printed this last yeare, and composed by him in Anno 1584. in which Theologicall and Philosophicall worke, he doth at large both by good reasons and also by his owne experience proue this his position to be true. And therefore I protest vn­to you, it was one of the chiefe Motiues, which moued me to translate this Report, to the end it might be more publikely knowen, that it was not the single fancie of one man, touching the temperature of these two Zones, but also of diuers others that by their owne trauell haue tryed the certayntie thereof: among whome, this Lopez was one, who deliuered this Re­lation in Anno 1588, being foure yeares after the Treatise made by Iosephus-a-Costa. And I do not doubt, but that within few yeares you shall haue it confirmed by many others that are and haue been trauellers, who haue not as yet publi­shed their knowledge and trials in this behalfe. In the meane time we do great iniurie to them that haue been alreadie so desirous to acquaint vs with their labours, and to make vs know as much as they know vpon their credites and honesties: when in stead of shewing our selues thankefull vnto them for the same, we skoffe and mocke at them, and confidently sweare that they are lyers, and opposite to all auncient Philoso­phers. But in a word, I will answere herein with an Argu­ment,Rhetoric▪ lib. 2. which Aristotle vseth, [...]. i. Siquidem in vsu est hominibus, mentiri id quod credibile: existimare oportet & con­trarium, Incredibilia multa hominibus, contingere [Page] vera: which for the better vnderstanding I must paraphrase in English: If it be an vsuall thing among men, that when a thing is reported, which is very credible and like to be true, yet afterwards it falleth out to be a starke lye: Then must we needes thinke on the contrary, That many Reports or things which are incredible, do in the end fall out to be true. In which case, as Credulitie leaneth a little to Foolerie, so Incredulitie smelleth somewhat of Atheisme.

Another Paradox is, That the heate of the Sunne is not the cause of Whitenesse or Blacknesse in the Skinnes of men. This Position in the Negatiue he may safely defend against all Philosophers, by vertue of the rea­sons that he hath vouched in this Report, which in deede do vtterly ouerthrow their Affirmatiue. But because neither any auncient Writer before this age, nor he himselfe, hath euer been able to declare the true cause of these colours in hu­mane bodies, very honestly and modestly he leaueth it vnde­cided, and referreth it to some secret of Nature, which hi­therto hath been knowne to God alone, and neuer as yet reuea­led to man. And therefore I do wish, that some sound Natu­rall Philosopher, such as Fernelius that wrote De abdi­tis rerum causis, or as Leuinus Lemnius de Occultis Naturae miraculis, or as Franciscus Valesius de Sacra Philosophia, would enter into the Closet of Contempla­tion, to finde out the true Naturall cause thereof. In the meane while I hold still with my Author in the Negatiue.

The third Paradoxe touching the Amazones mentio­ned in this booke, I do not see, why it should be counted a Pa­radox to beleeue, that there is such a Nation, considering how many Authors both Greeke and Latine, both Histo­riographers and Cosmographers, both Diuine and Pro­phane, haue acknowledged that Nation, and the Coun­trey [Page] wherein it inhabited. But our new Writers say, that a little after King Alexanders death it was vtterly ouer­throwne and quite extinguished. What? Vsque ad vnam? not one of them left aliue? Certainely that depopulation must needes proceede, either from the peculiar visitation of God al­mighties owne hand, or else it was the strangest slaughter that euer was heard of, that of a whole Nation, being so populous as that was, there should not remaine some few, that escaped. But yet suppose that some Hypsiphile, or Penthesilea, or Thalestris, or some such other, did wisely conueigh hir selfe away, cum Dijs Penatibus, cum Matre, & cum filia, and being guided by some happie Venus, arriued in a farre remote Region, and there obserued the customes and fashions of their owne Natiue Countrey: Might not these three, together with some other women that were desirous of Rule and gouernment, and allured by them to be of their Socie­tie; might not they (I say) in processe of time, (for it is a long time since Alexander died) breede a New Nation of A­mazones, although we neuer heard, in what Climate they remained? Yea it may be for any thing that I know, this latter generation might growe againe to be so populous, that they could send foorth Colonies from them into other places, and so plant themselues in diuers Countreys. For I heare that there are of them about Guiana, and heere in this Report I reade that some of them serue in the warres of the King of Monomotapa. And I hope that in good time, some good Guianian will make good proofe to our England, that there are at this day both Amazones, and Headlesse men. And thus much for the Paradoxes.

The last exception which may be made against this booke, is the discourse of the Conuersion of the Kingdome of Congo to Christianitie, which is amplified, and set out with [Page] such Miracles and Superstitious Vanities, as though it had been plotted of purpose for the glorie and aduancement of the Pope and his Adherents: Wherein, because it doth concerne matter of Religion, I will deale more warily and seriously to satisfie my Reader. True it is that the Inhabi­tants of Congo were all Pagans and Heathens, vntill they entertayned Traffike with the Portingales: Among whome, one Massing Priest became a meanes to conferre with a Noble Man of Congo concerning Christianitie, who taking liking thereof, as being a Man of good inclination and disposition, was very desirous to be further instructed. The Priest being wise, tooke oportunitie to make way for his Countreymens traffike, and also for planting of the Chri­stian Faith in that Region, It may be in hope to be prefer­red and aduanced in a new established Church, as com­monly our trauelling Priests vse to do, that wanting mainte­nance, or being vpon some occasion discontented at home, do leape ouer sea into forreine partes, not for the desier which they haue to gaine Christian Soules, or to preach the Gos­pell, but to procure to themselues either dignities or wealth. But I do not say that this Priest was such a one: for I neither haue reason nor authoritie so to say. For he sent ouer into Portingall for some fellowes to helpe him, who being come into Congo, laboured so much, that in time the King and his people consented to become Christians. Then did the Portingall-Priests bestirre themselues nimbly in Baptising the King, the Queene, the Lordes, and the Commons. They built Churches, they erected Altars, they set vp Cros­ses, and at last brought in a Bishop. And all this was done (I must needes confesse) with all pompe and solemnitie, after the Romish maner, which in deede is so plausible, as it is able to allure any simple Man or Woman, euen with the very sight [Page] thereof. Yet will I not denie, but that these Priests had a good intent, and for my part I do beleeue that they were in bona fide, because they conuerted a great part of the People, not to Poperie, but to Christianitie, the true foundation of all Religion. And this Action, which tendeth to the glory of God, and may be a notable example to the World, of do­ing the like, shall it be concealed and not committed to me­morie, because it was performed by Popish Priests and Po­pish meanes? Philip. 1. 1 [...]. God forbid. S. Paule maketh mention of diuers that preached Christ, Some of enuie and strife, and not purely, and Some of loue and good will. What then? Yet Christ is preached, whether it be vn­der pretence, or sincerely, and therein do I ioy. So these Men are not to be regarded, whether they preached Christ for vaineglory, and for maintenance of Poperie, or of a sin­cere minde: but certaine it is, that Christ was preached by them,Marke. 9. and therein ought we to ioy. In Marke and in Luke, S. Iohn saith to Christ, Luke. 9. Maister, we sawe one casting out Deuils in thy Name, but we forbad him, because he followeth not with vs. Forbid him not (saith Christ) for he that is not against vs, is with vs. If we see a Turke, or a Iewe, or a Papist, vpon what pretence soeuer, seeke to drawe any to Christ, or to driue the Deuill of Ignorance out of any, let him alone, forbid him not, mislike him not, for in that point hee is not against vs, nay peraduenture hee may become one of vs.Numb. 11. In the booke of Nombers, word was brought to Moses, that Eldad and Medad prophe­cied in the hoast. And Iosua sayd, My Lord Moses forbid them. But Moses sayd, Enuiest thou for my sake? Would God that all the Lords people were Prophets. And are we angrie, or shall we finde fault, that the Portingall Priests being Papists, should be reported to [Page] haue conuerted the Realme of Congo to the profession of Christian Religion? Shall we enuie them in their well doing? I for my part do earnestly wish with all my hart, that not onely Papists and Protestants, but also all Sectaries, and Presbyter-Iohns men would ioyne all together both by word and good example of life to conuert the Turkes, the Iewes, the Heathens, the Pagans, and the Infidels that know not God, but liue still in darknesse, and in the shadow of Death. What a singular commendation would it be vnto vs, if it might be left in Record, that we were the first con­uerters of such a Nation, and such a people, and first brought them to the knowledge of God, and the true profession of his glorious Gospell?

Thus I haue (gentle Reader) laboured to satisfie such scruples, as may arise in thy minde touching this Treatise: which if it shall breede either profit or delight vnto thee, I shall reioyce to my selfe: If not, I shall be sorie that I haue employed my precious time so idly. Farewell in Christ.

Abraham Hartwell.

Errata.

Folio. 5. in the Margin. The commodities of S. Elena. Fol. 14. line 2. put out in. Fol. 15. lin. 11. Carde. Fol. 19. lin. 23. [...]. Fol. 21. in the Margin. Songa. Ibidem lin. 22. language. Fol. 30. lin. 14. Equinoctiall. Fol. 31. lin. 25. Goate. Fol. 39. lin. 19. Tissue. Fol. 40. lin. 13. Infulas. Fol. 49. lin. 31. Peacocke. Fol. 57. in the Margin. Capo. Fol. 63. lin. 15. Diameter. Ibid. in Margin. Cap. 1. Fol. 67. lin. 6. and for diuers. Fol. 114. line 22. put out the comma. Fol. 137. line 11. Naturall. Fol. 172. lin. 19. and. Fol. 192. lin. 18. Marques. Fol. 199. lin. vlt. est. Fol. 204. lin. 14. come. Fol. 211. lin. 5. put out the comma. Fol. eod. lin. 31. put out and. Fol. 212. lin. 15. Ptolomée. Fol. 216. in the Margine, for head, reade heauen.

In the Table.

Folio vlt. line 26. to the Red sea.

A REPORTE OF the kingdome of Congo, a Regi­on of Africa.
Gathered by Philippo Pigafetta, out of the discourses of M. Edwarde Lopes a Portugall.

Chap. 1. The iourney by sea from Lisbone to the kingdome of Congo.

IN the yeare one thousande fiue hundreth threescore and eygh­teenth,Anno Dom. 1578. when Don Sebastian king of Portugall, embarked himselfe for the conquest of the kingdome of Marocco: Edwarde Lopes borne at Beneuentum (a place xxiiii. myles distant from Lisbone, neere vpon the South shore of the riuer Tagus) sayled likewise in the moneth of Aprill to­wardes the hauen of Loanda, situate in the kingdome of Congo, in a shippe called S. Anthony, belonging to an vncle of his, and charged with diuerse marchandises for that kingdome:Patache 1. a Brigandine or a Pinnisse. And it was accompanied with a Patache (which is a small vessell) whereunto the ship did continually yeelde good guarde, & ministred great reliefe, conducting and guiding the same with lightes [Page 2] in the night time, to the ende it shoulde not loose the way, which the ship it selfe did keepe. He arriued at the Islande of Madera, belonging to the King of Portugal,The Island of Madera. distant from Lisbone about sixe hundred myles, where he remained xv. dayes, to furnish himselfe with freshe vittaile and wine; which in great aboundance grow­eth in that Islande, yea and in mine opinion the best in the world, whereof they carry abroad great store in­to diuers countries, & especially into England. He pro­uided there also sundry other confections & conserues of Sugar, which in that Islande are made and wrought both in great quantity, and also of singular excellency. From this Islande they departed, leauing all the Cana­ries belonging to Castile, The Canaries. and tooke hauen at one of the Islandes of Capo verde, called S. Anthony, without ha­uing any sight thereof before they were come vpon it:Isle of S. An­thony. and from thence to another Islande called Saint Iacopo, Isle of S. Iames which commaundeth all the rest, and hath a Bishoppe and a Chaplen in it, that rule and gouerne them: and here they prouided themselues againe of victuailes.

I doe not thinke it fitte in this place to tell you the number of the Canarie Islands, which indeede are ma­ny: nor to make any mention of the Islandes of Capo verde, nor yet to set downe the history and discourse of their situations, because I make hast to the kingdome of Congo: and the shippe stayed here but onely for pas­sage, and especially for that there doth not want good store of Reportes and histories, which in particularity doe make relation of these countries: Onely this I will say,The Islandes of Capo verde. that these Islandes of Capo verde were established by Ptolomee in the tables of his Geography, to be the begin­ning of the West, together with the Cape or Promon­torie [Page 3] which he termeth Cornu vltimum, or the Islandes Macarie or Blessed, which we commonly call Fortunate. In these Islandes of Capo verde the Portugalles do often arriue, and in those countries do trafficke with sundry marchandises, as little balles of diuers coloured glasse, & other such things, wherein those people do greatly de­light, and Hollande cloth, and cappes and kniues, and coloured clothes: In exchaunge whereof they bringe back againe, slaues, wax, hony, with other kind of food, and cotton-cloth of sundry colours. Moreouer, right ouer against them within the lande are the countreyes & riuers of Guynee, and of Capo verde, and Sterra Leona, that is to say the Mountain Leona, which is a huge great mountaine and very famous.

From the foresaide Islande of San Iacopo, they direc­ted their fore-decke towards Bresil: for so they must do to gaine the winde, and taking such harboroughes as were conuenient for the seasons that raigne in those places,Two waies from S. Iacopo to Loanda. to arriue at the ende of their voyage. Two are the waies, whereby they saile from the Isle of San Iaco­po to Loanda a hauen in the kingdome of Congo: The first way. the one is by the coast of Africa, the other by the mayne Ocean, still enlarging their course with the North winde, which very much ruleth there in those Monethes, and for the most parte is called North, euen by the Portu­galles themselues, & by the Castilians, & by the French, and by all those people of the North sea. And so tur­ning their foreshippe to the South, and south-east, they holde on forwarde till they be neere the Cape of Good-Hope, leauing behind them the Kingdome of Angola; for by that way they must afterwardes returne: & then they come to the altitude of betweene xxvij. and xxix. [Page 4] degrees beyond the equinoctiall, quite opposite to our Pole, which South Pole in this writing shall be called the Antarctike,The Antarctik is the South Pole. that is to say, contrary to the Arctike, which is our North Pole, and so the Antarctik is oppo­site thereunto towardes the South.

In that altitude then of the contrary Pole, the Say­lers vse to meete with certaine windes that they cal Ge­nerali, which doe blowe there almost all our Sommer, and are termed by them Northeast, and Northeastes in the plural number, and by vs Italians, Li venti dal Graeco, that is to say, the windes betweene the Northeast, and the Easte in the spring time: which peraduenture the Venetians in their proper speech doe call Leuantiere, that is to say, easterly, & the Greekes and Latines terme them Etesii, that is to say, such winds as euery yeare do ordinarily blow in their certayne and accustomed sea­sons.

And thus sayling euen to xxix degrees of the An­tarctik, with the North winde, there falleth out an admirable effect. For diuers saylers, perceyuing the first Generall windes when they blowe, doe straight turne their sailes about, and set their fore-ship directly on the way to Angola, and so very oftentimes they fayle and are deceyued. But better it is for him that desireth to arriue at his wished hauen to go much further, & to expect a lustie winde, and after to returne backwarde: wherin it is to be noted for a most memorable accidēt, that the windes do blow very strong from the North, euen vnto xxix. degrees beyond the Equinoctiall, and then they meete with other winds, which being more fierce & furious then they are, doe driue them backe a­gaine. And this is vsuall and seasonable there for sixe [Page 5] monethes in the yeare.

Now the ship called S. Anthony, holding on his fore­said course, met with the said Generall windes, & then turned their prowe and their sayles, by North and by Northwest on the right hand towardes the kingdome of Congo. And sayling onwardes closely with the halfe shippe, they came in twelue dayes and twelue nightes, to the Islande of S. Elena, not looking for the same, nor thinking of it.Isle of S. Elena. This Islande was so called, because on the feast day of S. Helene, which falleth vppon the thirde day of May, it was by the Portugalles first des­cried. And as it is very smal, so is it (as it were) singular by it selfe: for being situate in the height of xvi. degrees towardes the Antarctike, it contayneth in compasse nine miles about, & is farre distant from the firme land. As you sayle by sea, it may be discouered thirty myles of, through certayne hilles: and it is a great miracle of nature, that in so vnmeasurable an Ocean, being all a­lone and so little as it is, it shoulde arise (as it were) out of a most tempestuous and deep sea, & yet yeeld a most safe harborough, and most aboundant store of reliefe and victuaile, for shippes that are forewearied, and rea­dy to perishe for thirst, which come out of the In­dies.

The woodes of it are very thicke, and full of Ebene trees,The commo­dities of S. Elena. whereof the Mariners do builde their boates. In the barkes of these trees you may see written the names of an infinite number of Saylers,Woode. which passing by that Islande, doe leaue their names cut and carued in the sayde barkes, the letters whereof doe grow greater and greater, as the bodies of the trees doe waxe greater in bignes. The soyle (euen of it selfe) bringeth forth very [Page 6] excellent fruites.Vine trees For there groweth the vine, (which was in deede at the first brought thether by the Portu­galles) and especially in the arbours and walkes that are about the little Church, and in the lodgings that are there for such as sayle thether.Fruites. You shall see there also huge wild woodes, of Orenges, of Citrones, of Limons and other such Apple trees, that all the yeare long doe carry flowers & fruites both ripe and vnripe. And like­wise Pomegranates, great and sweete, and of a good indifferent taste, with kernelles great and redde, and ful of pleasant iuyce, and the stones within them very smal: and ripe they are at all seasons of the yeare, as the Oren­ges are: and figges very great both in quantity and a­boundance: which naturall gift and property (of being ripe all the yeare long) Homere noted to bee in diuers fruites of the Isle of Corfu. Odysi. H.

Ouer all the countrey they take Goates,Victuailes. and wilde Kiddes, that are very good to eate, and Boares and o­ther foure-footed beasts, and Partriches, and wild hens and Pigeons, and other kindes of foules, both great & small. All which beastes and fowles are so secure and so tame, that they feare not a man, because they doe not know in what daunger they are to be killed. So that the people which dwell there doo take of them dayly, and poulder them with salte, that is congealed on the banks of the Islande in certaine caues and holes of the rockes, that are naturally made hollow and eaten by the waues of the sea. And the flesh thereof being thus preserued, they giue to the Saylers that arriue at the Island.

The earth is as it were crommeled like ashes,The Soyle. of co­lour redde, very fat and fruitfull beyond measure, and so soft, as if ye treade on it with your foote; it will sinke [Page 7] like sande, and the very trees will shake with the force of a man. And therefore it needeth no labour or tillage: for when it raigneth, the fruites doe presently spring vp out of the olde seede. It beareth rootes of Radish as bigge as a mans legge,Rootes and hearbes. and very good to eate. There growe also Colewortes, and Parsley, and Lettise, and Goordes, and Chiche-person, and Faselles, and other kindes of Pulse, naturally: which being ripe doo fall in­to the fruitfull grounde, and multiply of themselues, and spring agayne without any tilling. Euery shippe that commeth thether, bringeth with it some fruyte or garden hearbe, which being planted taketh roote pre­sently: and bountifull nature yeeldeth a courteous re­warde and vsury, by reseruing the fruite thereof for the Saylers when the ship returneth againe.

There are certaine little Riuers in this Islande,Riuers. that runne in diuerse partes of it: whose water is good and wholesome, and wherein are sundry safe places for ships to ryde in, as if they were hauens. But the prin­cipall of them is in a place, where they haue erected a little Church, wherein are kept the ornamentes of the Altar, and the priestes vestimentes, and other necessaries for Masse. And when shippes passe that way, the Re­ligious persons go downe vnto them to celebrate di­uine seruice.

There is also in the same place a little cottage, where­in for the most parte some Portingalles doo remayne, sometimes three, sometimes two, yea and sometimes but one alone, being left there, eyther by reason of some infirmitie, or for some offence committed, or else euen voluntarily, because they doe desire by this meanes to leade the life of an Heremite in that wilder­nesse, [Page 8] and so to doe penaunce for their sinnes.

Moreouer,Fishe. in the same place there is so great aboun­daunce of fish, as if the sea were very neere vnto them: so that you shall not need but onely to cast your hooks into the water, and you shall presently drawe them out againe loaden with fish.

I once demanded the questiō,Why the Is­land of S. Elena is not fortified what reason there was, why the Portingals did neuer make any accompt, nor had any care to fortifie this Island, considering it was so fit and necessary for saylers, and founded there (as it were by the prouidence of God) for the reliefe of the Portingals which passe that way, as Granata doth large­ly discourse vpon the Creede, first written by him in Spanishe, and since translated by my selfe into Italian: But aunswere was made vnto mee, that there was no need so to doo: for that the Islande serueth to no pur­pose for the voyage into the Indies, because there is another way for that passage, and it is also a very harde matter to finde it out: but in returning from thence it lyeth full in the way, and is very easily descried. So that it woulde not quite the cost to bestow money & time in maintayning souldiers therein without any profite, seeing none other vessels come thither but onely the Portugals. And when I replyed, that the English had nowe twice entred into those seas;This slaunde­rous terme v­sed here by this Portugal, cannot im­peach the cre­dite of these two honoura­ble gentlemen once vnder the con­duct of Drake, and secondly this year 1588. vnder ano­ther Pirate, being also an English man and more valiant then hee, called Candish, who is returned home ful of great richesse: It was aunswered, that yet for all that it coulde not possibly bee brought to passe to fortifie the same within a sea being so farre off, and seeing that all the prouision which should build there, must of ne­cessity [Page 9] bee brought out of Europe.

To be short,The Climate. besides all these naturall good giftes aboue rehearsed, the climate is temperate, the ayre pure, cleane and holesome, and the winds which blow there are very pleasaunt. So that sicke persons, and such as were halfe deade with the diseases of the sea, arry­uing at this Island, haue beene presently healed, and recouered their former strength, through the benigni­ty of this Country.

From the Islande of S. Helena, The Port of Loanda. they made sayle with the same weather, and so within the space of xvij. dayes came to the hauen of Loanda, which is in the prouince of Congo, the windes being somewhat more calme then they were afore. This is a very sure, and a great hauen, so called of an Islande of the same name, whereof wee shall speake hereafter.

I told you before, there were two courses of sayling from the Islands of Capo verde to Loanda; the one of thē is now declared, which beeing neuer vsed afterwardes, was at the first attempted and performed by the same ship wherein Signor Odoardo went, being then guided by Francesco Martinez the kings Pilot, a man very great­ly experienced in those seas, and the first that euer con­ducted vessell by that way: the other is atchieued by passing along the coast of the firme lande.

From the Island of San Iacomo, The seconde course of say­ling to Loāda. The Isle of S. Thomas. they come to Capo dos Palmas, and from thence direct themselues to the Islande of San Thomas, which lyeth vnder the Equino­ctial, so called because it was discouered vpon that day, wherein the feast of that Apostle is vsed to bee celebra­ted. It is distant from the firme lande CLxxx. myles, right against the riuer called Gaban, which is so termed [Page 10] because it is in shape very like to that kinde of vesture that it is called a Gaban or a cloake.

The hauen thereof is fore-closed with an Island that raiseth it selfe in the chanell of the riuer,The Hauen of S. Thomas. whereunto the Portingalles do sayle with small barkes from S. Thomas Islande, carrying thether such thinges as vsually they carry to the coast of Guinea, and from thence carrying backe with them Iuory, waxe & hony, Oyle of Palme, and blacke-More slaues. Neere to the Islande of S. Thomas towardes the the North lyeth another Islande, cal­led the Isle of the Prince,The Isle of the Prince. distant from the firme lande an hundred and fiue miles, being of the same conditi­on and trafficke, that the Isle of S. Thomas is, although in circuite somewhat lesse. This Islande of S. Thomas is in fashion almost rounde,The Isle of S. Thomas. Great traffick. and in breadth contayneth Lx. miles, and in compasse Clxxx. Very rich it is and of great trafficke, discouered at the first and conquered by the Portingalles, at such time as they began the con­quest of the Indies. It hath diuers hauens, but the prin­cipal and chiefest of all, whereinto the vesselles arriuing there, doe withdraw themselues, is in the place, where the Cittie standeth.

The Islande breedeth an infinite deale of Sugar, & almost all kinds of victuals.Sugar. Churches. A Castell. In the Citty there are some Churches, and a Bishoppe, with many Clerks and one Chaplen or Prieste. There is also a Castell, with a garrison and Artillary in it, which beat vpon the hauen, being a very great and a safe Port, where many shippes may ride. But a very straunge and admirable thing it is, that when the Portugals did first come thether, there was no sugar there planted, but they brought it thether from other Countreys:Ginger. as they did Ginger also, which [Page 11] tooke roote, & grew there in most aboundant manner. The soyle in deed is moyst, and as it were appropriated to foster the Sugar Cane, which without any other wa­tering, multiplyeth of it selfe, and fructifieth infinitely: the reason whereof is, because the dewe falleth there like rayne and moisteneth the earth.

There are in this Island aboue Lxx. houses or presses for making of Sugar,70. houses to make sugar in. and euery presse hath many cot­tages about it as though it were a village, & there may bee about some three hundred persons that are appoin­ted for that kinde of worke: They do euery yeare loade about fortie great shippes with sugar. True it is indeed that not long ago the wormes (as it were a plague to that land) haue deuoured the rootes of the Canes, and destroyed the fruites of their sugar, in such sort, as now of the forty shippes, they do not load aboue fiue or sixe vessels with that marchandise. And therevpon it com­meth that sugar is growen so deare in those Coun­treyes.

The Island of S. Thomas holdeth trafficke with the people that dwell in the firme lande, which do vsually resort to the mouthes or entries of their Riuers: The first whereof (to begin withal) is named the riuer of Fernando di Poo, The Riuer & Island of Fer­nando Poo. that is to say, of Fernando Pouldre, who did first discouer the same, and lieth in fiue degrees to­wardes our Pole. Right against the mouth of it, ryseth an Island of the same name,R, Bora. La Riuierae del Campo. lying thirty and sixe miles distant from it. The seconde Riuer is called Bora, that is to say,R. di San. Be­nedetto. Filth. The thirde La riuiera del Campo: The fourth, di San Benedetto, and the fifth, that of Angra, which in the mouth of it hath an Islande called di Coris­co, R di Angra. The Isle of Corisco. that is to say Thonder. All these doe trafficke the same [Page 12] marchaundises, which we mentioned before.

But to returne to the voyage of S. Thomas: The Cape of Lupo Gonzale. Depar­ting from thence towardes the South, wee found the Cape of Lupo Gonzale, which standeth in the altitude of one degree beyonde the Equinoctiall towardes the Pole Antarctike, a hundred & fiue miles distant from the foresaid Isle. And from thence they sayle with land winds, creeping stil all along the coast, and euery day casting ancre in some safe place, either behynde some point, or else in some hauen, vntill they come to the mouth of the greatest Riuer in Congo, called in their tongue Zaire, Zaire the grea­test Riuer of Congo. which signifieth in Latine Sapio, (in English I knowe.) From whence if ye will go through to the hauen of Loanda, yee must saile the length of an hundred and fourescore miles.

These bee the two voyages by sea, that bee vsed from the Islande of San Iacomo, which is one of those Islandes, that before wee tolde you were the Islandes of Capo verde, & was but a little while ago first begun to be frequented.

And nowe it is time to intreate of the kingdome of Congo, and all the conditions thereof.

Chap. 2. Of the temperature of the ayre of the kingdome of Congo, and whether it bee very colde or hote: whether the men be white or blacke: whether are more or lesse blacke they that dwell in the hilles, or those that dwell in the playnes: Of the winds and the raynes, and the snowes in those quar­ters, and of what stature and semblaunce the men of that Countrey are.

THe Kingdome of Congo in the middle part therof,The situation of Congo. is distant from the Equinoctiall towardes the Pole Antarctike (iust where the Cittie called Congo doth lie) seuen degrees and two thirdes: so that it standeth vnder the Region which auncient writers thought to be vnhabitable, and called it Zona Torrida, (that is to say, a Cincture or Girdle of the earth, which is burnt by the heat of the Sun) wherin they are altogether deceiued.The tempera­ture of the kingdome. For the habitation there is excee­ding good, the ayre beyonde all credite temperate, the winter nothing so rough, but is rather like Autumne in this Region of Rome. The people vse no furres, nor chaunge of apparell: they come not neere the fire: nei­ther [Page 14] is the colde in the toppes of the Mountaines grea­ter then that which is in the plaines: but generally in Winter time the ayre is more hote then it is in som­mer, by reason of their continual raynes, and especially about two houres before & after Noone, so that it can hardely be endured.

The men are blacke,The complex­ion of the people. & so are the women, and some of them also somewhat inclyning to the colour of the wilde Oliue. Their hayre is black & curled, and some also red. The stature of the men is of an indifferent big­nes, and excepting their blacknes they are very like to the Portingalles. The apples of their eies are of diuerse colours, blacke and of the colour of the sea. Their lips are not thicke, as the Nubians and other Negroes are: and so likewise their countenaunces are some fat, some leane, and some betweene both, as in our countreyes there are, and not as the Negroes of Nubia and Guinea, which are very deformed.Small diffe­rence between their, daies & nightes. Their nights and their daies doo not greatly differ: for in all the whole yeare yee shall not discerne the difference betweene them to bee more then a quarter of an houre,

The Winter in this countrey (to speake at large) be­ginneth at the same time,Their winter & sommer. that our Spring here begin­neth, that is to say, when the Sun entreth into the Nor­thren signes, in the Moneth of March. And at the same time that we haue our winter, whē the Sun entreth in­to the Southern Signs in the moneth of September, then beginneth their sommer. In their winter it rayneth 5. monethes almost continually, that is to say, in April, May, June, July & August. Of faire daies they haue but a few, because the raine falleth so greatly, & the drops of it are so big, as it is a wonder to see. These waters doe [Page 15] maruellously supple the grounde, which is then very drie, by reason of the heate of the Sommer past, where­in it neuer rayneth for the space of sixe monethes to­gether, and after the ground is full and as it were ingor­ged with water, then do the riuers swell beyond all cre­dite, and are so replenished with troubled waters, that all the countrey is surrounded by them.

The windes which blow in these Moones through all this region,The winds in this Country, in winter time. are the very selfe same that Cesar calleth by a Greeke worde Etesij, that is to say, Ordinary euery yeare: whereby are meant those winds that in the Cearde are noted from the North to the West, and from the North to the Northeast. These windes doo driue the cloudes to the huge and high mountaines, whereupon they rush with very great violence, and being there stai­ed of their owne nature, they are afterwardes melted into water. So that when it is likely to raine, you shall see the cloudes standing (as it were) vpon the toppes of their highest hils.

And hence ariseth the encreasing and augmentati­on of the riuers that spring in Aethiopia, The cause of the encrease of Nilus, and other riuers in Ethiopia. and especially of Nilus and others, that discharge themselues into the east and west Ocean: And in the kingdome of Congo and Guinea, through which runneth the riuer Nigir, so called by the auncient writers, and by the newe termed Senega, The Riuer Nigir or Se­nega, runneth westwarde. you shall see the saide riuer encrease at the very selfe same time that Nilus doth; but in deed carrieth his waters towards the west, directly against the Islandes of Capo Verde, Nilus run­neth north­warde. whereas Nilus runneth by the Isle of Me­roe in Egipt towardes the North, refreshing and wate­ring all those Regions that are full of scorching heates, and wildernesses and deserts. Now for as much as in [Page 16] the regions of Congo and Aethiopia it is alwaies wont to rayne euery yeare at a certaine set tyme, the swelling and ouerflowing of the riuers there, is of no great consideration, nor any straunge accident to make ac­compt of.

But in the Countries,It neuer ray­neth in Egypt but onely in Alexandria. that are farre distant and very drie, as in Aegypt, where it neuer raineth (sauing onely in Alexandria and the territories thereof) it is accoun­ted a maruellous matter, to see euery yeare so great a quantity of thicke troubled water come vppon them, from places so remote, at a certaine set tyme, without missing: which water doth quicken the grounde, and ministreth foode both to man and beast. And there­vpon the auncients did sacrifice to that riuer, calling it [...], the good God, as Ptolomy noteth in his fourth booke. Yea and some of our Christians at this day doo hold it for a miracle. So that without these waters they shoulde perish for hunger, because their liues do de­pende vpon this increase of the water, as S. Chrysostome saith.

Thus these windes called by Cesar Etesij, and by the Portugalles Generali, do blow with vs in Sommer; but with them in winter, and carry the cloudes vnto the toppes of those huge mountaines, which make them to melt into raine. And so it falleth out that by reason of these raines, their winter (as it is aforesaid) is nothing so colde, because the waters do engender a certayne kind of warmth in those hot regions. This is then the cause of the increase of Nilus, & other riuers in that Climate, whereof the ancients of old times made so great doubt, and inuented so many fables and errours

But in their sommer, which is our winter, there blow [Page 17] other windes that are quite opposite to the former,Their winds in sommer time. e­uen in Diametro, and are noted in the Carde, from the South to the southeast, which out of all question must needes be colde, because they breath from the contra­ry Pole Antarctike, and coole all those countreyes, euen for all the worlde as our windes in Sommer doo coole our countreyes. And whereas, there with them, these windes do make the ayre very fayre and cleere, so doo they neuer come vnto vs, but they bring with them great store of raine. And this commeth to passe by a certain naturall disposition of the earth which is gouer­ned by the Heauens and the Clymates thereof, and by the soueraigne prouidence of God, who hath parted the heauen, and the course of the sunne and of the other planets in such sort, that euery countrey vpon the face of the earth, doth inioy the vertue of their lightes, both in heate, and in colde, and also in all other seasons of the yeare, by a most singular measure and proportion. And certainly if the breath of these winds did not refresh and coole these countries of Aethiopia & Congo, and other places neere about them, it were not possible for them to endure the heate, considering that euen in the night tyme they are constrayned to hange two coueringes ouer them to keep away the heat. The same cooling and refreshing by windes, is common also to the inhabitants of the Isle of Candie, & of the Islandes in Arcipelago, and of Cyprus, and of Asia the lesse, and of Soria, and of Aegypt, which doe liue (as it were) with this refreshing of the foresaid winds of the Northwest, and of the West: so that they may well be called as they are in Greeke Zephyri quasi [...],No Snow nor ice in Ethiopia or Congo. breeders of life.

Let it bee also remembred, that in the mountaines of [Page 18] Aethiopia, and of Congo & the regions neere adioyning, there falleth no snow, neither is there any at all in the very toppes of them, sauing onely towardes the Cape of Good-Hope, and certaine other hilles, which the Por­tugalles call, Sierra Neuada, that is to say, the Snowie mountaines. Neyther is there anye ice or snow to bee founde in all the Countrey of Congo, which would bee better esteemed there then golde, to mingle with their drinkes: So that the riuers there doo not swell and in­crease by melting of snow, but because the raine doth fall out of the cloudes for fiue whole Moones continu­ally together, that is to lay in April, May, Iune, Iuly, & August: the first raine sometimes beginning on the xv. day, and sometimes after. And this is the cause why the newe waters of Nilus, which are so greatly desired & expected by the inhabitaunts there, do arriue sooner or later in Aegipt.

Chap. 3. Whether the children which are begotten by Portugalles, be­ing of a white skinne, and borne in those Countries by the women of Congo, bee blacke or white, or Tawney like a wilde oliue, whom the Portugals call Mulati.

AL the auncient writers haue certainly beleeued,The true cause of white & blacke in the bodies of the inhabi­tantes of these countries. that the cause of blacke co­lour in men is from the heate of the Sun. For by experience it is founde, that the neerer wee approach to the cuntries of the South, the browner & [Page 19] blacker are the inhabitants therein. And contrariwise, the farther you go towardes the north, the whiter shall you finde the men, as the French, & the Dutch, & the English, and others. Notwithstanding it is as certaine a thing as may be, that vnder the Equinoctiall, there are people which are borne almost all white, as in the king­dome of Melinde & Mombaza situate vnder the Equino­ctial, & in the Isle of San Thomas which lieth also vnder the same Clymate, and was at the first inhabited by the Portingalles, though afterwardes it was disinhabited, and for the space of a hundred yeares and vpwardes their children were continually white, yea and euery day still become whiter and whiter. And so likewise the children of the Portingals, which are borne of the women of Congo, do incline somewhat towards white. So that Signor Odoardo was of opinion, that the blacke colour did not spring from the heate of the Sunne, but from the nature of the seede, being induced thereunto by the reasons aboue mentioned. And surely this his opinion is confirmed by the testimony of Ptolome, who in his discription of the innermost partes of Lybia ma­keth mention of white Ethiopians which hee calleth in his language [...]; that is to say, white Moores, and in another place also of white Elephants, which are in the same countrey.

Chap. 4. Of the circuite of the Kingdome of Congo, and of the bor­ders and confines thereof. And first of the Westerne coast.

THe Kingdome of Congo is distingui­shed by foure borders: The first, of the West, which is watered with the O­cean sea: the seconde of the North: the thirde of the east, & the last which is towardes the South.

And to beginne with the border lying vpon the sea, the first part of it is in the Bay,The westerne border of Congo. The Bay of Cowes. called Seno delle Vacche, & is situate in the height of 13. degrees vpon the Antarctik side, and stretcheth all along the coast vnto 4. degrees and a halfe on the North side, neere to the Equinoctial; which space contayneth 630. miles. This Seno delle vac­che is a hauen but of a moderate bignes, and yet a good one & able to receiue any ship that arriueth. It is called Seno delle vacche, that is to say, the Bay of Cowes, because thereabouts there are pasturing very many heardes of that kind of Cattel: The country is plain, & aboundeth with all manner of victuailes: and there you shall find some kinde of mettels to be publikely solde, especially siluer, and it is subiect to the King of Angola.

A little more forwarde lyeth the Riuer Bengleli, The Riuer Bengleli. where a certaine Lorde, being subiect to the King of Angola doth specially commande: and about the said [Page 21] Riuer is a great compasse of countrey, much like to the former. And a little further runneth the riuer Songa, The R. Son so called by the Portingalles: wherein you may sayle 25. miles vpwardes in a country also like to the former. The followeth the riuer Coanza, which issueth out of a little lake,The R. Coāza fedde by a certaine riuer that floweth out of a great lake, being the chiefe and principal spring or head of Nilus, wherof in the other part of this discourse we shall haue occasion to write. Coanza at the mouth of it is two miles broade, and you may sayle with small barkes vpwardes against the streame about 100. miles, but hath no hauen. And here it is to be noted, that all this Country which we haue here described, was wont to be subiect to the king of Congo: but a while ago the Gouernour of that countrey is become the absolute Lorde thereof, and professeth himselfe to bee a friende to the king of Congo, but not his vassall: and yet some­times he sendeth the King some present, in manner of a tribute.

Beyond the Riuer Coanza is the hauē of Loanda being in ten degrees, made (as it is said) by a certaine Island called Loanda, The Island of Loanda. which signifieth in that lauguage, Bald or Shauen, because it is a Countrey without any hilles and very low: for indeed it scarce rayseth it selfe aboue the sea. This Island was framed of the sand and durt of the sea, and of the riuer Coanza, whose waues meeting to­gether, and the filthy matter sinking downe there to the bottome, in a continuance of time it grew to be an Island. It may be about 20. miles long, and one mile broade at the most, and in some places but onely a bowshoote. But it is a maruellous thing, that in such a sandy ground if you shall digge to the depth of two or three hande-breadthes [Page 22] you shall finde sweete water, the best in all those Countreyes. Wherein also there is a very strange effect, that when the Ocean ebbeth, this water becom­meth somewhat salte, but when it floweth to the top, it is most sweete. A thing that falleth out also in the Islande of Cadis in Spayne, by the report and testimo­ny of Strabo.

This Islande is the Mine of all the money which the King of Congo spendeth,The money of Congo. and all the people therea­boutes. For vppon the shores you shall haue certayne women, that vse to diue and ducke into the sea, two yardes deepe and more, and fill their baskets with sand, and afterwardes diuide the grauell from certayne smal Shel-fishes that are among it, which are called Lumache: & when these Lumache are seuered by themselues, then doe they picke out the Males from the Females, which they may easily do, because the Female is more fine then the Male, and greatly esteemed for her colour, which is very neat, bright and pleasant to the sight.

These Lumache doo breede in all the shores of the kingdome of Congo, but the best of all are those of Lo­anda, The Lumache of Loanda. because they looke very fine, and of a very bright colour, some gray or ashecoloured, and some of other colours not so precious. And here you must note that gold and siluer and mettell is not of any estimation, nor in vse of money in these countreyes, but onely these Lu­mache: so that neither with golde nor siluer, in masse or in coine you shal buy any thing there, but with these Lumache you shall buy both golde and siluer, or any thing els.

In this Islande there are 7. or 8. Townes, called in that Country language, Libata, the principal where­of [Page 23] is Spirito sancto: Spirito Santo. and therein dwelleth the Gouer­nour which is sent from Congo, to minister iustice, and to gather the treasure of the moneyes of these Lumache. Here are also Goates, and Sheepe, and Boares in great numbers, which being tame at the first, do afterwardes become wilde and liue in the woods. Here groweth also a tree called Enzanda, which is a great one and al­waies greene,The tree Eu­zanda. and endued with a singular qualitie. For from the bowes of it that sproute vpwardes, there hang downe certaine threedes (as it were) which creeping into the earth do take roots, & out from these roots do rise other trees, & so they multiply. And within the out­most barke thereof, there groweth a certaine kind of pil like fine linnen, which being beaten and cleansed, they spreade out in length and in breadth, and therewith they cloath their men and women, that are of the basest sort.

In this Islande they haue certaine vessels, made of the bodies of Palme-trees, Their Boates. ioyned together and framed after the manner of our boates, with a prowe and a sterne, wherin they passe from place to place, both with oares and sayles. In these boates they vse to fish about the riuers, which are indeede exceeding full of fish, and sometime also they will go ouer to the firme lande.

In that part of this Islande, which is towardes the maine land, in certaine lowe places there grow certaine trees (which when the water of the Ocean ebbeth) di­scouer themselues: and at the feet thereof you shal find certaine other Shel-fishes cleauing as fast to the trees as may bee,Shelfishes. hauing within them a great fish as bigge as a mans hande, and very good meate. The people of the countrey know them very well, and call them Ambizia­matare, [Page 24] that is to say,Ambiziama­tare. the Fishe of the Rocke. The shels of these fishes, they vse to burne, and thereof make very good lime to builde withall. And being like the corke or barke of the tree which is called Manghi, they dresse their Oxe hydes withall, to make their shooe soles the stronger.

To be briefe this Island bringeth forth neither corne nor wine,What kind of money is vsed in sundry countries. but there is great store of victuaile brought thether from all parts thereaboutes, to fetch away these Lumache. For as in all other places all things may be had for money of mettell, so all things here are had for Lu­mache. Whereby may bee noted, that not onely here in this kingdome of Congo, but also in her neighbour E­thiopia and in Africa, and in the kingdomes of China, & certaine others of the Indies, they vse moneyes of other matter then of mettall, that is to say, neyther golde, nor siluer, nor copper, nor any other mixture tempered of these. For in Aethiopia their money is Pepper: and in the kingdome of Tombutto, which is about the Riuer Nigir, otherwise called Senega, their money is Cockles or Shelfishe: and among the Azanaghi their moneyes are Porcellette: and in the kingdome of Bengala likewise they vse Porcellette and mettall together. In China they haue certaine Shelfishes, called also Porcellette, which they vse for their money: & in other places Paper stam­ped with the kings seale, and the barks of the tree called Gelsomora: Whereby it appeareth, that the money which is payed for euerie thing is not mettall, all the worlde ouer, as it is in Europe, and in many and sundry other countries of the earth.

This Islande in the straitest part of it, is very neere to the firme lande, and the people do oftentimes swimme [Page 25] ouer the channell there. In this straite there arise out of the Ocean certaine Islettes, Certaine Islettes. which shewe themselues forth from the water when it ebbeth, and are couered a­gaine when it floweth. And in those Islettes you shall see great trees, and most excellent Shelfishes cleauing fast to the bodies of them, such as I tolde you of be­fore.

Neere to this Islande towardes the outwarde coast to the sea,Great store of Whales there swim an innumerable sorte of Whales, that looke blacke, and fighting one with another doe kill themselues: which afterwardes being by the waues cast vp vpon the shore, as bigge as a midling marchants shippe; the Negroes goe forth with their boates to fetch them, and to take the oyle out of them, which be­ing mingled with pitch they vse to trimme their vessels withall. Vpon the ridges or backes of these creatures, there growe many Shelfishes, made like Snailes, Cockles and Whelkes: whereof Signor Odoardo affirmed, that hee had seene great store. He was also of opinion that Am­ber commeth not from these fishes. For ouer all the coast of Congo, where there is an infinite number of them,Amber com­meth not from the Whales. you shal not finde either Ambregriz, or any other Amber, blacke or white in any place. And yet if it should come from these creatures, there must haue beene of necessity great store of it founde vpon these Shores.

The principall hauen of this Island hath his entrance towardes the North,The hauen of Loanda. and on that side it is halfe a mile broade, and of a very great depth. Vpon the firme land directly ouer against the Island is a towne called villa di San Paulo, Villa di San Paulo. altogether inhabited with Portingalles, and their wiues, which they brought with them out of Spaine: and yet it is not fortified.

[Page 26] All this channell is very full of fish, especially of Sar­dinaes, Store of fish. and of Anchioues: whereof there is so great store, that in the winter time they will of themselues leape vp to land. Other kindes of most excellent fishes there are, as Soles and Sturgeons and Barbelles, and all manner of dainty fish: and great Crabbes, in straunge aboundance, and all very wholesome: so that the greatest parte of the people that dwel about the banks there, do liue vp­on them.

Into this channell runneth the Riuer called Bengo, The R. Bengo. which is a very great one, & nauigable vpwardes xxv. miles. This Riuer with that other of Coanza, whereof I tolde you before, doe make the Isle of Loanda, because when their waters do meete together, they leaue their sande and filth behind them, and so increase the Island. There runneth also into it another great Riuer called Dande, The R. Dande which wil receiue vessels of an hundred tunne: & then another Riuer called Lemba, The R. Lembe. which neither hath Hauen, neyther do any Shippes enter into it. Very neere vnto this there is also another Riuer called Ozone, The R. Ozone. which issueth out of the same Lake, whence Nilus like­wise springeth, and it hath a hauen. Next to Ozone, there is another called Loze, The R. Loze. without any hauen: and then a­nother great one with a hauen called Ambriz, The R. Am­briz which runneth within foure leagues neere to the Royall Citty of Congo. The L. Lelun­da. Last of all is the Riuer Lelunda, which signifi­eth a Trowtfish, and watereth the rootes of that great hil, wheron the pallace of Congo standeth,The Oteiro of Congo. called by the Por­tingalles the Oteiro. This Riuer Lelunda springeth out of the same Lake, from whence Coanza issueth, and ta­keth into it by the way another Riuer, that commeth from the great Lake: and when it doth not raine, then [Page 27] you may passe ouer Lelunda on foote, because it hath so little store of water in it.

Next vnto this is the Zaire, The R. Zaire. a huge Riuer and a large, and in deed the greatest in all the kingdome of Congo. The original of this Riuer commeth out of three Lakes: one is the great Lake from whence Nilus springeth, the second is the little Lake aboue mentioned, and the third is the second great Lake which Nilus engendreth. And certainely, when you will consider the aboundance of water that is in this Riuer, you will say, that there was no nede to haue any fewer or lesser springes to make so huge a streame as this carrieth. For in the very mouth of it, which is the onely entraunce into it, the Riuer is 28. myles broad, and when it is in the height of his in­crease, he runneth fresh water. 40. or 50. miles into the sea, and sometimes 80. so that the passengers doe refresh themselues withal, & by the troublesomnes of the wa­ter they know the place where they are. It is nauigable vpwardes with great barkes about 25. miles, vntill you come to a certaine straite betweene the rockes, where it falleth with such a horrible noise, that it may be hearde almost 8. miles. And this place is called by the Portin­galles Cachiuera, that is to say a Fall, or a Cataracte, like to the Cataractes of Nilus. Betweene the mouth of this Riuer,Certaine Is­landes. and the fall thereof, there are diuers great Islands well inhabited, with townes and Lordes obedient to the king of Congo, which sometimes for the great enmi­tie that is among them doo warre one against another in certaine boates,Boates. hollowed out of a stocke of a tree, which is of an vnmesurable bignes, & these boats they call Lungo. The greatest boates that they haue, are made of a certaine tree called Licondo, The tree Li­condo. which is so great, that [Page 28] sixe men cannot compasse it with their armes, and is in length of proportion aunswerable to the thicknesse, so that one of them will carrie about 200. persons. They rowe these boates with their oares, which are not tyed to any loopes, but they holde them at libertie in their handes, and moue the water therewith at pleasure. E­uery man hath his oare and his bowe, and when they fight together, they lay downe their oare and take their bowe. Neyther do they vse any other Rudders to turne and gouerne their boates, but onely their oares.

The first of these Islandes,The Isle of Horses. which is but a little one, is called the Isle of Horses, because there are bredde and brought vp in it great store of those creatures that the Greekes call Hippopotami, that is to say, Water-horses. In a certaine village within this Islande doe the Portingals dwel, hauing withdrawen themselues thether for their better securitie. They haue their vesselles to transporte them ouer the water to the firme lande, vpon the south banke of the Riuer, which lande is called the hauen of Pinda, The hauen of Pinda. where many shippes doe ryde that arriue there­in.

In this Riuer there are liuing diuerse kinds of crea­tures,Crocodiles. Water-horses. and namely mighty great Crocodiles, which the Countrey people there call Caiman, and Water-horses a­boue named: And another kind of creature, that hath (as it were) two hands, and a taile like a Target, which is called Ambize Angulo, Hogge-fish. that is to say a Hogge-fishe, be­cause it it as fat as a Porke. The flesh of it is very good, and thereof they make Larde, and so keepe it: neyther hath it the sauour or taste of a fish, although it bee a fishe. It neuer goeth out from the fresh water, but fee­deth vpon the grasse that groweth on the banks, & hath [Page 29] a mouth like the mozell of an Oxe. There are of these fishes, that weigh 500. poundes a peece. The fishermen vse to take them in their little boates, by marking the places where they feed, and then with their hookes and forkes, striking and wounding them, they drawe them dead forth of the water: and when they haue cut them in peeces, they carry them to the king: For who soeuer doth not so, encurreth the penaltie of death, and so doe they likewise that take the Trowt, and the Tenche, and another Fishe called Cacongo, Cacongo, a fish like a Salmon. which is shaped after the likenes of a Salmon, sauing that it is not red: but indeed so far it is, that it quencheth out the fire whiles it is ro­sted or broiled. Other fishes also there are that are called Fishes Royall, which are carried to the king, vpon very seuere and rigorous punishmentes, by open proclama­tion to be inflicted on such as shall do the contrary, be­sides other kindes of fishes that are taken in this Riuer, the names whereof we thinke it superfluous here to re­cite.

Beyonde this Riuer of Congo, La Baia de las Almadias. there commeth downe another Riuer, which the Portingalles call, La Baia de­las Almadias, that is to say, the Golfe of Barkes, because there are great store of them, that are made there, by reason of the aboundance of woods & trees that growe thereabouts, which are fit for that vse, and wherewith all the Countries round about do furnish themselues. At the mouth of this Bay there are three Islandes, one great Isle in the middle of the Channell, which maketh a conuenient hauen for small vesselles, and two other lesse, but none of them inhabited.

A little higher runneth another streame,The R. de las Barreras Ver­meglias. not verye great, which is called De las Barreras Rossas, of the redde [Page 30] Clay-pittes, because it floweth from among certaine Rockes of hils, whose earth is died with a redde colour: where also there is a very high mountain, called by the Portingals, La Sierra Gomplida, that is to say, The long Mountaine.

And yet going vp a little further, there are two Golfes of the sea in the likenesse of a paire of Spectacles, where­in is a good heauen,Baya d' Aluaro Gonzales. called La Baia d' Aluaro Gonzales, that is the Golfe of Aluaro Gonzales. Beyonde all these are certaine hilles and shoars, not worth the remembrance, vntill you come to the Promontorie that is called by the Portingalles Capo de Caterina, which is the border of the kingdome of Congo towardes the Equinoctiall, Capo di Cate­rina. and is distant from the Equinostiall line two degrees and a halfe, which is 150▪ Italian miles.

Chap. 5. Of the North coast of the Kingdome of Congo, and the confines thereof.

NOw from Capo de Caterina on the North side beginneth another border or Coast of the kingdome of Congo, The Northren border of Congo. which Eastwarde stretch­eth it selfe to the place where the Riuer Vuniba ioyneth with the Ri­uer Zaire, contayning the space of [Page 31] 600. miles and more. Beyonde this coast of Congo to­wardes the North, and vnder the Equinoctiall lyne vp­on the sea shoare, and about 200. miles within lande, (comprehending in that reckoning the foresaide Golfe of Lope Gonzales) the people called the Bramas doo inha­bite in a Countrey,The Bramas. that is nowe called the kingdome of Loango, The kingdom of Loango. and the king thereof Mani-Loango, that is to say, the King of Loango. The Countrey hath great a­boundance of Elephantes, whose teeth they exchange for iron, whereof they make their arrowe heades, their kniues, and such other instrumentes. In this Countrey also, they weaue certaine cloath of the leaues of Palme trees, in sundry sorts: as wee shal tell you in some other place of this narration.

The king of Loango is in amity with the King of Con­go, The people of Loango cir­cumcised. and the report is, that in times past he was his vassaile. The people are circumcised after the manner of the Hebrues, like as also the rest of the nations in those coun­tries vse to be. They do traffick together one with ano­ther, & sometimes make war against their neighbors, & are altogether of the same nature, whereof the people of Congo are. Their armour are long targets, which co­uer almost all their bodies,Their armour, Empachias▪ made of very hard & thicke hides of a certaine beast called Empachas, somwhat lesse then an Oxe, with hornes like the hornes of a Coate: (this Creature is also bred in Germanie, and is called a Dante.) The hides thereof are transported out of these countreyes, and out of the kingdome of Congo into Por­tingale, and from thence into Flanders, where they are dressed; and then they make ierkens of them as good as breastplates and corselets, which they call iackets of Dante. Their weapons offensiue are dartes with long [Page 32] and large heads of iron, like Partizans, or like the aunci­ent Roman Pilum or Iauelin: the staues whereof are of proportionable length to cast, hauing in the middest of them a certaine peece of wood, which they take in their hands, and so with greater force and violence discharge their dartes. They carry also certaine daggers, which are in shape much like to the heads of their dartes.

Beyond the kingdome of Loango, are the people cal­led Anzigues, The countrey of Anzicos. of whom wee shall deliuer vnto you a hi­story, which in truth is very strange, and almost incre­dible for the beastly and cruell custome, that they vse in eating mans flesh, yea and that of the neerest kinsefolkes they haue: This countrey towards the sea on the West, bordereth vpon the people of Ambus: and towardes the North, vpon other nations of Africa, and the wilder­nes of Nubia: and towardes the East, vpon the seconde great Lake, from whence the Riuer of Congo springeth, in that parte which is called Anzicana: and from the king­dome of Congo, it is diuided by the Riuer Zaire, where­in there are many Islandes (as before is tolde you) scat­tered from the lake downewardes, & some of them be­longing to the dominion of the Anzigues, by which Ri­uer also they do trafficke with the people of Congo.

In this kingdome of the Anzigues there are many Mines of Copper, Sanders. and great quantitie of Sanders both redde and graie: the red is called Tauilla, and the graie (which is the better esteemed) is called Chicongo, whereof they make a poulder of a verie sweet smell, and diuerse medicines. They do also mingle it with the oyle of Palme tree, and so annoynting all their bodyes ouerwithall, they preserue themselues in health. But the Portingalles vse it being tempered with Vinegar, [Page 33] which they lay vpon their pulses,Medicines for the French Pockes. & so heale the French Pockes, which they call in that language Chitangas.

Some doe affirme, that this gray Sanders is the very Lignum Aquilae, that groweth in India: and Signor Odo­ardo affirmed, that the Portingals haue proued it for the heade ake,For the headeache. by laying it on the coales, and taking the smoake of it. The pith and innermost parte of the tree is the best, but the vtter parte is of no estimation.

They make great store of linnen of the Palme tree, both of sundry sortes and coloures, and much cloth of silke, whereof we will discourse more hereafter. The people are subiect to a king▪ that hath other princes vn­der him: they are very actiue and warlike:Their Bowes. They are ready to take armes, and doo fight on foote. Their wea­pons are different from the weapons of all other people rounde about them: for their bowes are small and short, made of wood, and wrapped about with serpents skins of diuers colours, and so smoothly wrought, that you woulde thinke them to be all one with the wood. And this they doo, both to make the bowe stronger, and also to holde it the faster. Their stringes are of little wood­den twigges, like reedes, not hollow within, but sound and pliable, and very dainty, such as the Caualieros of Portingale do carry in their handes to beat their palfries withall. They are of an ashe colour, and of a Lion taw­ney, somwhat tending to blacke. They growe in the Countrey of the Anzigues, and also in the kingdome of Bengala, Their arrows. through which the riuer Ganges runneth. Their arrowes are short and slender, and of a very hard wood, and they carry them on their bow hande. They are so quicke in shooting, that holding xxviij. shaftes or moe in their bow-hand, they will shoote and discharge them [Page 34] all, before the first arrow light on the grounde: yea and sometimes there haue beene seene diuers stout archers, that haue killed birds as they flie in the ayre.

Other weapons also they make, as Axes and Hat­chets, Their weapons which they vse and frame after a strange manner. For the handle is shorter by the halfe then the iron is, and at the lowest end of it there is a pommell▪ for the fa­ster holding of it in the hand, and all couered ouer with the foresaid skinne of a serpent. In the vppermost ende of it, is the iron very bright and shining, fastned to the woode with plates of Copper, in the manner of two nailes, as long as the handle: it hath two edges, the one cutteth like a hatchet, and maketh a wounde after the fashion of a halfe Roundell▪ the other is a hammer. When they fight with their enemies, or defende them­selues from their arrowes, they are so exercised with a wonderful speed and nimblenesse to manage their wea­pons, that whirling them rounde about, as it were in a circle, they keepe all that compasse of the ayre which is before them, so that when the enemie shooteth, & the arrowe beginneth to fall, it lighteth vpon the hatchet, being so swiftly and vehemently whirled about, that it breaketh the force of the arrowe, and so it is repulsed: Then do they hang the Hatchet vpō their shoulder, & begin to shoot themselues. They haue also certaine short daggers, with sheathes of the serpents skins, made like kniues with a haft vnto them, which they vse to weare a crosse. Their girdles are of diuers sorts, but the men of war haue their girdles of Elephants skin, 3. good fingers broad: & because they are at the first 2. fingers thicke, & very harde to handle handsomly, by the heate of the fire they bow thē round, & so with certain buttons tie them [Page 35] ouerthwart about them. The men are very actiue and nimble,The nature of the Anzicos▪ and leape vp and downe the mountaines lyke Goates. Couragious they are and contemne death: men of great simplicitie, loyalty and fidelitie, and such as the Portingalles doo trust more then any other. In so much as Signor Odoardo was wont to saye, that if these Anzichi woulde become Christians, (being of so great fidelity, sincerity, loyalty and simplicity, that they wil offer themselues to death, for the glory of the world, and to please their Lordes will not sticke to giue their owne flesh to bee deuoured) then woulde they with a farre better harte and courage endure martirdome, for the name of our redeemer Iesus Christ, and would most honourably maintaine our faith and religion, with their good testimony, and example against the Gentiles.

Moreouer,Their mar­chandise. the said Signor Odoardo did likewise af­firme, that there was no conuersing with them, because they were a sauage and a beastly people, sauing onely in respect that they come and trafficke in Congo, bringing thether with them slaues both of their owne nation, & also out of Nubia (whereupon they do border) & linnē ­cloth (whereof we will tell you hereafter.) & Elephantes teeth: in exchange of which chaffare they recarry home with thē Salt & these Lumache, which they vse in steed of their money & coine; and another greater kinde of Lamache, which come from the Isle of S. Thomas, and which they vse to weare for brooches to make them­selues fine & gallant withal. Other marchaundises also they carry backe with them which are brought out of Portingall, as silks, and linnen, and glasses, & such like.

They vse to circumcise themselues: and another foolish custome they haue, both men and women, as [Page 36] well of the nobilitie,The Anzichi are circumci­sed and mar­ked in their faces. as of the commonalty, euen from their childhood to mark their faces with sundry slashes made with a knife, as in due place shal be further shew­ed vnto you.

They keepe a shambles of mans flesh as they do in these countryes for beefe and other victuailes.A shambles of mans flesh. For their enemies whom they take in the warres, they eate, and also their slaues, if they can haue a good market for them, they sell: or if they cannot, then they deliuer them to the butchers to be cut in peeces, and so solde, to be rosted or boyled. And (that which is a maruellous history to report) some of them being weary of their liues, and some of them euen for valour of courage, and to shew themselues stout and venturous, thinking it to be a great honour vnto them, if they runne into volun­tary death, thereby to shewe that they haue a speciall contempt of this life, will offer themselues to the but­chery, as faithfull subiectes to their Princes, for whose sakes, that they may seeme desirous to doe them nota­ble seruice, they do not onely deliuer themselues to be deuoured by them, but also their slaues, when they are fat and well fed, they doe kill and eate them. True it is that many nations there are, that feede vpon mans flesh as in the east Indies, and in Bresill, and in other places: but that is onely the flesh of their aduersaries and ene­mies,A strange beastly cu­stome. but to eat the flesh of their owne frendes and sub­iectes and kinsefolkes, it is without all example in any place of the worlde, sauing onely in this nation of the Anzichi.

The ordinary apparel of these people is thus:Their apparel. The cō ­mon sort go naked from the girdle vpwards, & without any thing vpon their heades, hauing their hayre trussed [Page 37] vp and curled. The noble men are apparelled in silkes and other cloath, and weare vpon their heades blewe and red, and blacke colours, and hattes and hoodes of Portingale Veluet, and other kindes of cappes vsuall in that countrey. And indeede they are all desirous to haue their apparell handsome and neat as their hability will suffer them. The women are all couered from top to toe, after the common manner of Africa. The poorer sort of them doe girde themselues close from the girdle downewards. The noble women and such as are of wealth, do weare certaine mantelles, which they cast ouer their heades, but keepe their faces open and at li­bertie: & shooes they haue on their feet, but the poore go barefoote. They go very quicke and lightsome: Their stature is comely, and their conditions fayre and commendable.

Their language is altogether different from the lan­guage of Congo, Their lan­guage. and yet the Anzichi will learne the lan­guage of Congo, very soone and easily, because it is the plainer tonge: but the people of Congo do very hardely learne the language of the Anzichi. And when I once demaunded what their religion was, it was tolde mee they were Gentils, and that was all that I could learne of them.

Chap. 6. Of the East coast of the Kingdome of Congo, and the confines thereof.

THe East Coast of the kingdome of Congo, beginneth (as we haue tolde you) at the meeting of the Riuer Vumba, The Easterne border of Congo. and the Riuer of Zaire; and so with a line drawen towardes the South in equall di­stance from the Riuer Nilus, which lyeth on the left hande, it taketh vp a great mountaine which is very high, & not inhabited in the toppes thereof, called the mountaine of Christal, The moun­taine of Chry­stall. because there is in it great quantity of Christal both of the mountaine and of the cliffe, and of all sorts. And then passing on further includeth the hilles that are called Sierras de Sol, The moun­taines of the Sunne. that is to say, the hilles of the Sunne, because they are exceeding high. And yet it neuer sno­weth vpon them, neyther doe they beare any thing, but are very bare and without any trees at all: On the leaft hand there arise other hils, called the hilles of Sal-Nitrum, The moun­tains of Sal-Nitrum. because there is in thē great store of that Mine­ral. And so cutting ouer the riuer Berbela, that commeth [Page 39] out of the first Lake, there endeth the ancient bound of the kingdome of Congo on the East.

Thus then the east coast of this kingdome is deriued from the meeting of the two foresaid riuers Vumba and Zaire, vntill you come to the lake Achelunda, and to the Countrey of Malemba; contayning the space of sixe hundred miles. From this lyne, which is drawen in the easterne coast of Congo to the riuer Nilus, and to the two Lakes (whereof mention shalbe made in conuenient place) there is the space of 150. miles of ground wel in­habited, and good store of hils, which do yeeld sundry mettalles, with much linnen, and cloth of the Palme tree.

And seeing wee are now come to this point of this discourse,The arte of making Silkes in this Eastern Coast. it will be very necessary to declare vnto you the maruellous arte which the people of this countrey, and other places thereabouts do vse in making cloathes of sundry sortes, as Veluets shorne and vnshorne, cloth of Tinue, Sattens, Taffata, Damaskes, Sarcenettes and such like, not of any silken stuffe, (for they haue no knowledge of the Silkewormes at all, although some of their apparell bee made of silke that is brought thether from our Countreys.) But they weaue their cloathes a­forenamed of the leaues of Palme trees, which trees they alwayes keepe vnder and lowe to the grounde, euery yeare cutting them, and watering them, to the ende they may grow smal and tender against the new spring. Out of these leaues being cleansed & purged after their manner they drawe forth their threedes, which are all very fine and dainty, and all of one euennesse, sauing that those which are longest, are best esteemed. For of those they weaue their greatest peeces. These stuffes [Page 40] they worke of diuers fashions, as some with a nappe vp­on them like Veluet on both sides, and other cloath cal­led Damaskes, braunched with leaues, and such other thinges; & the Broccati, which are called High and Lowe, and are farre more precious then ours are. This kinde of cloath no man may weare but the king, and such as it pleaseth him. The greatest peeces are of these Broccati: for they contayne in length fower and fiue spannes, and in breadth, three and foure spannes, and are called Incorimbas, by the name of the countrey where it grow­eth, which is about the Riuer Vumba. The Veluettes are called Enzachas of the same bignesse, and the Damaskes Insulas, and the Rasi Maricas, and the Zendadi Tangas, & the Ormesini Engombos. Of the lighter sort of these stuffes they haue greater peeces which are wrought by the An­zichi, and are sixe spannes long, and fiue spannes broade, wherewith euery man may apparell himselfe according to his habilitie. Besides that, they are very thicke and sounde to keepe out the water, and yet very light to weare. The Portingalles haue lately begun to vse them for tents and boothes, which do maruellously resist both water and winde.

This coast then shutteth vp the kingdome of Congo, which lyeth Westwarde of it:The Riuer Nilus. and from this Coast with a line of equall distance somwhat more towardes the East runneth the riuer Nilus, about 150. miles, contay­ning within it a Countrey that aboundeth with all the commodities aboue rehearsed, possessed by sundrye Lordes, some subiect to Prete Gianni, and some to the mighty King Moënemugi. In all which Countrey there was nothing worth the noting, sauing that from Nilus towards the West, the people do trafficke with the [Page]

[figure]

[Page] [Page 43] kingdome of Congo, and the riuers of that sea: and from thence towardes the East they goe through the king­domes of Moenemugi, euen to the sea of Mombaza and Mozambiche.

Chap. 7. Of the confines of the kingdome of Congo to­wardes the South.

THis Easterne Coast (as it is be­fore set downe) endeth in the mountain called Serras de Plata, The Southern Coast. that is the mountaines of siluer,The moun­tain of Siluer. and there beginneth the fourth and last border of the kingdome of Congo, towardes the South, that is to say, from the foresaide mountaine to the Bay of Cowes on the West, contay­ning in length the space of foure hundred & fifty miles. And this Southerne line doth parte the kingdome of Angola in the middle, and leaueth on the left hand of it, the foresaide mountaines of Siluer, and further beyond them towardes the South the Kingdome of Matama, which is a great kingdome, very mighty, and absolute of it selfe, and sometimes in amity, and sometimes at vtter enmitie with the kingdome of Angola.

The king of Matama is in religion a Gentile,The K. of Matama. and his [Page 44] kingdome stretcheth towardes the South to the riuer Brauagal, and neere to the mountains commonly called the Mountaynes of the Moone, and towardes the east bordereth on the Westerne bankes of the riuer Bagami­dri, and so crosseth ouer the riuer Coari.

This countrey aboundeth in vaultes of Christall and other mettalles, and all manner of victuaile, and good ayre. And although the people thereof, & their neigh­bour borderers do trafficke together: Yet the King of Matama, and the king of Angola doo oftentimes warre one against the other, as we told you before: And this riuer Bagamidri diuideth the kingdome of Matapa from the kingdome of Monomata, which is towards the East, and whereof Iohn de Barros doth most largely discourse in the first Chapter of his tenth booke.

Towardes the sea coast there are diuers Lordes, that take vpon them the title of kinges: but indeed they are of very base and slender estate: Neyther are there any portes or hauens of any account or name in the riuers there. And nowe forasmuch as wee haue oftentimes made mention of the kingdome of Angola, The K. of Angola. this will be a very conuenient place for vs to intreate thereof: be­cause it hath beene heretofore saide, that the king of Angola, being in times past but a Gouernour or Deputy vnder the king of Congo, although since that tyme he is become a good Christian, yet hath he made himselfe a free and an absolute Prince, and vsurped all that quar­ter to his owne iurisdiction, which before hee had in re­giment and gouernement vnder another. And so after­wards in time conquered other countries thereabouts, insomuch as he is now growen to bee a great Prince, & a rich, and in power little inferiour to the king of Congo [Page 45] himselfe, and therefore eyther payeth tribute, or refu­seth to pay tribute vnto him, euen at his owne good pleasure.

It came to passe,Iohn the se­cond, K. of Portingall, first brought chri­stianity into Congo. that Don Giouanni the second, being king of Portingall, planted the christian religion in the Kingdome of Congo, and thereupon the king of Congo became a Christian. After which time the Lorde of Angola was alwaies in amitie, and (as it were) a vassall of the forenamed King of Congo, and the people of both countries did trafficke together one with another, and the Lord of Angola did euery yeare sende some presents to the king of Congo. And by licence from the King of Congo there was a great trade betweene the Portingalles and the people of Angola at the hauen of Loanda, where they bought slaues and chaunged them for o­ther marchaundises, and so transported all into the Isle of Sainte Thomas. Whereby it came to passe, that the trafficke was heere vnited with the trafficke of S. Thomas: so that the shippes did vse first to arriue at that Islande, and then afterwarde passed ouer to Loan­da. And when this trade began in processe of time to increase, they dispatched their shippes from Lisbone to Angola of themselues, and sent with them a Gouernour called Paulo Diaz of Nouais, Paulo Diaz the first disco­uerer of this trafficke. to whome this busines did (as it were) of right appertaine, in regarde of the good desertes of his auncesters, who first discouered this traf­ficke. To this Paulo Diaz did Don Sebastiano King of Portingale graunt leaue and authority to conquere,Don Sebastian K. of Portin­gall. for the space of xxxiij. leagues vpwardes along the coast, beginning at the Riuer Coanza towards the South, and within the lande also, whatsoeuer hee coulde get, to­wardes all his charges for him and his heyres. With [Page 46] him there went many other shippes that opened and found out a great trade with Angola, which notwith­standing was directed to the foresaide hauen of Loanda where the saide shippes did still discharge themselues. And so by little & little he entred into the firme land,Paulo Diaz buildeth a house in Anzelle & made himselfe a house in a certain village called Anzelle within a mile neer to the riuer Coanza, because it was the more commodious & nigher to the trafficke of Angola.

When the trade here beganne thus to increase, and marchaundises were freely caried by the Portingales, & the people of Congo to Cabazo a place belonging to the Lorde of Angola, The authour calleth him Lord, because he was then but a petty king. and distant from the sea, 150. miles, there to sell and barter them, it pleased his Lordship to giue out order, that all the Marchants should be slaine, and their goods confiscated, alleadging for his defence, that they were come thether as spies, and to take pos­session of his estate: but in truth it is thought that hee did it onely to gaine all that wealth to himselfe, consi­dering that it was a people that did not deale in the ha­bite of warriours, but after the manner of Marchants. And this fell out in the same yeare, that the King Don Sebastiano was discomfited in Barbarie.

When Paulo Diaz vnderstoode of this course, he put himselfe in armes against the King of Angola, Paulo Diaz in armes a­gainst the K. of Angola. and with such a troupe of Portingals as he could gather together that were to bee founde in that countrey, and with two Gallies and other vessels, which he kept in the riuer Co­anza, he went forwarde on both sides of the riuer con­quering, and by force subdued many Lords, and made them his frendes and subiectes. But the king of Angola perceyuing that his vassalles had yeelded to the obedi­ence of Paulo Diaz, and that with all prosperous suc­cesse [Page 47] he had gayned much land vpon him, he assembled a great army to go against him, and so vtterly to destroy him.P. Diaz de­mandeth suc­cour of the K. of Congo. Whereupon Paulo Diaz requested the King of Congo that he woulde succour him with some helpe to defende himselfe withall, who presently sent vnto him for aid an army of 60 thousand men, vnder the conduct of his cosin Don Sebastiano Manibamba, and another cap­tayne with 120. Portingale souldiers, that were in those countryes, and all of his owne pay for the atchieuing of this enterprise. This army was to ioyne with Paulo Di­az, and so altogether to warre against the King of Ango­la: but arriuing at the shoare, where they were to passe ouer the riuer Bengo, within 12. miles of Loāda, & where they shoulde haue met with many barkes to carry the Campe to the other shore, partly because the said barks had slacked their cōming, & partly because much time wold haue been spent in transporting so many men, the whole armie tooke their way quite ouer the riuer, and so going on forwardes they met with the people of the King of Angola, that were ready to stoppe the souldiers of Congo, The millitary order of the people of Congo. from entering vpon their Countrey.

The military order of the Mociconghi (for by that terme we do call the naturall borne people of the king­dome of Congo, as wee call the Spaniardes those that are naturally borne in Spaine) and the military order of the people of Angola, is almost all one: For both of them doo vsually fight on foote, and diuide their armie into seuerall troupes, fitting themselues according to the si­tuation of the field where they doo incampe, & aduan­cing their ensignes and banners in such sort as before is remembrd.

The remoues of their armie are guided and directed [Page 48] by certaine seuerall soundes and noyses, that pro­ceede from the Captayne Generall, How the soul­diers doo vn­derstand the pleasure of their Generall. who goeth into the middest of the Armie, and there signifieth what is to bee put in execution: that is to say, eyther that they shall ioyne battell, or els retyre, or put on forward, or turne to the right hand, and to the leaft hand, or to performe any other warlick action. For by these seueral sounds di­stinctly deliuered frō one to another they doe all vnder­stande the commandementes of their Captayne, as we heere among vs doo vnderstande the pleasure of our Generall by the sundrie stroakes of the Drumme, and the Captaines soundes of the Trompet. Three kinds of instru­ments vsed in their wars.

Three principall soundes they haue which they vse in warre: One which is vttered aloude, by great Rattles 1 fastned in certaine woodden cases, hollowed out of a tree, and couered with leather, which they strike with 2 certaine little handles of Iuory. Another is made by a certaine kinde of instrument, fashioned like a Pyramis turned vpwarde: for the lower ende of it is sharpe and endeth as it were in a point, and the vpper end waxeth broader & broader like the bottom of a Triangle, in such sort that beneath they are narrow & like an Angle, & a­boue they are large and wide. This instrument is made of certayne thinne plates of iron, which are hollowe and empty within, and very like to a bell turned vp side downe. They make them ring, by striking them with woodden wandes: and oftentimes they do also cracke them, to the ende that the sound should be more harsh, horrible, and warlicke: The thirde instrument is 3 framed of Elephants teeth, some great, and some small, hollowe within, and blowen at a certaine hole which they make on the side of it, in manner of the Fife, and [Page 49] not aloft like the Pipe. These are tempered by them in such sort that they yeelde as warlicke and harmonious musicke as the Cornet doth, and so pleasant and iocund a noyse, that it moueth and stirreth vp their courages, & maketh them not to care for any daunger whatsoeuer. Now of these three seueral sorts of warlick instruments, there are some bigger and some lesse.The vse of these instru­ments. For the Captayne Generall carrieth alwaies with him the greater sort, to the ende that by them he may giue signification to the whole Campe what they shall doo. The particular bandes and troupes of the armie haue in like manner their smaller sort, and euery Captayne in his seuerall re­giment hath also one of the smallest, which they strike with their handes. Whereupon it falleth out, that when they heare the sounde of the generall Rattle, or Cornet, or the other thirde kinde of instrument, euery part of the army doth presently answere in the same note, signi­fying thereby that they haue wel vnderstood the good pleasure of the Captaine, and so consequently the vnder Captaines do the like. Neyther do they onely vse these instruments and sounds vniuersally, but also when they are in fight in skirmish, the valiant and couragious souldiers go before the rest, & with this kinde of belles, which they strike with their woodden wandes, they dance, & encourage their fellows, & by the note do sig­nifie vnto them in what danger they are, and what wea­pons they haue met withall.

The militarie apparell of the better sort,The Millitary apparell of the better sort. and of the Lords of the Moci-Conghi is this. On their heades they carry a cappe, which is garnished with sundry plumes of the feathers of the Eastruche, of the Peaeocke, of the Cocke, and of other kindes of birdes, which make them [Page 50] to seeme men of greater stature then they are, and terri­ble to looke vpon. From the girdle vpwards they are all naked, and haue hanging about them from their necks, both on the right side and on the leaft, euen as lowe as to both their flanks, certaine chaines of iron, with rings vpon them as bigge as a mans little finger, which they vse for a certaine military pompe & brauery. From the girdle downewardes they haue breeches of linnen, or sendale, which are couered with cloath, and reach downe to their heeles, but then they are folded againe vpwardes and tucked vnder their girdle. Vpon their girdle, which (as we tolde you) is made with exquisite and curious worke, they do fasten certaine belles, very like to the instruments that are before named, which in moouing of themselues and in fighting with their ene­mies, do ring & make a noise, & ad courage vnto them, while they are in combate with their aduersaries. Vp­on their legges they haue likewise their buskins after the Portingall fashion.Their weapōs. Their armour we haue already declared, that is to say, bowe and arrowes, sworde, dag­ger and Target: but yet with this caueat, that whosoe­uer weareth a bowe, he weareth also a dagger, but no target: for those two weapons may not be worne toge­ther, but sword & target they may lawfully weare both at once.

The common souldiers go all naked from the girdle­stead vpwardes,The Military apparell of the meaner sort. and haue the rest of their bodies armed with bowe and arrowes and daggers. These are they that do first offer the skirmish, going out before the rest of the armie, as it were seuerally and dispersedly pro­uoking to fight, and receyuing the shot from a farre of, they turne and winde this way and that way, and [Page 51] doo nimbly leape from one side to another, to the ende they may auoide the lighting of their enemies arrowes. Besides these there are also certaine quicke and gallant young men that runne out before the rest, which with the ringing of their bels (as afore is sayde) are as it were comforters of their fellows, and when they haue fought so much, that the Captaine thinketh them to bee euen weary, then doth he call them backe with the sounde of one of those instruments aboue mentioned: so that per­ceyuing the medley to waxe hote, they turne about and retyre themselues back againe, & others succeed in their places, which course is still obserued and kept vntill such time, as both the armies do indeed ioyne all their maine forces together, and so fight it out.

In the place aboue described,The issue of this battell. there were sundry en­counters on the one side and on the other. And in the first battels the people of Congo remayned conquerours: but afterwards, when they had diuers times fought to­gether with great losse on both sides, and victuailes be­gan nowe to faile, and consequently men waxed sicke and died, the Campe of the king of Congo was dissolued, and euery man returned to his owne home.

In this meane while Paulo Diaz, P. Diaz at Luiola. though he coulde not ioyne his forces with the Armie of his frendes that came to succour him, yet set himselfe forwardes, and passing ouer the riuer stayed at Luiola, because it was a place very strong & fit to resist the King of Angola. The situation of Luiola is this: The two riuers Coanza and Luiola do ioyne together about 105. miles from the sea shore, and a little aboue the said ioyning together, these Riuers doe seauer themselues for the space of an Arcu­buse shotte, so that they make as it were an Islande be­tweene [Page 52] them: In which Islande at the meeting of the two riuers there riseth a hill, which Paulo Diaz surprised and fortified for his better safety. And whereas in times past there was neuer any habitation there, nowe at this present it is growen to be a prety conntrey inhabited by the Portingalles.

From this place thus surprised by Paulo Diaz, and called Luiola, you may saile along the riuer with certain small vesselles, euen to the sea, and goe by lande with­out any daunger for the space of one hundred and fiue miles.The hilles of Cabambe. Neere therevnto are the hilles that are called the hilles of Cabambe, producing infinite store of siluer: which the saide Diaz doth euery day by little and little endeauour to conquere. And these hils are the graund quarrell betweene him and the people of Angola. For knowing that the Portingalles doe esteeme greatly of these hilles, in regarde of the siluer pits which are there in great aboundance, they doe vse all the force and skill they can to keepe the Portingalles from them. They fight also with them in diuers other places: for the Por­tingalles passing ouer the riuer Coanza doe continually make inroades into the countries that are subiect to the king of Angola.

The weapons of these peoples, are bowes sixe hand­fulles long,The weapons of the people of Angola. with stringes made of the barkes of trees: & arrowes of woode, lesse then a mans little finger, and sixe handefuls long. They haue iron heads made like a hooke, and feathers of birdes in the toppes of them: and of these arrowes they vse to carry to the number of sixe or seauen vpon their bow hand, without any quiuer at all. Their daggers are fashioned with a haft after the manner of a knife, which they weare at their girdle, on [Page 53] their left side, and hold them aloft in their hands, when they fight with them.Their military actions. By their Militarie actions and pro­ceedinges you may obserue their great skill and good order in matter of warre. For in diuers battels that were betweene them and the Portingalles, it was plainly seene how they coulde choose their aduantages against their enemies, as by assaulting them in the night time, and in rayny weather, to the ende that their arcubuses and guns shold not take fire, & also by diuiding their forces into many troups, to trouble them the more. The king doth not vse to go to the warre in his owne person, but sendeth his Captains in his steed. The people are also ac­customed to flie & run away incontinently, as soone as they see their Captaine slaine, neyther can they be per­swaded to stay by any reason or argument, but present­ly yeelde vp the fielde. They are all footemen, neyther haue they any horses at all. And therefore the Cap­taines if they will not go on foote, cause themselues to be carried on the shoulders of their slaues, after one of the three manners, which wee will shew vnto you here­after. This nation goeth out to warre in number almost infinite, and very confusedly: they leaue no man at home that is fit to carry a weapon: they make no prepa­ration of victuailes necessary for the Campe: but such as perhaps haue any, conuey it with them vpon the shol­ders of their seruantes, and yet they haue sundry sortes of creatures that might bee managed, and serue their turnes to drawe and to carry as in the seconde part of this Treatise shalbe described vnto you. And thereup­on it falleth out, that when they come into any country with their whole armie, all their foode is quickly quite consumed, & then hauing nothing leaft to feede vpon, [Page 54] they dissolue their hoast euen in the greatest necessity of prosecuting their enterprise, and so are inforced by hunger to returne into their owne countries.

They are greatly giuen to Diuination by birdes: If a bird chaunce to flie on their leaft hand,They are giuē to diuination by birdes. or crie in such manner, as those which make profession to vnderstand the same, doe say that it fore-sheweth ill lucke and ad­uersity, or that they may go no further forwardes, they will presently turne backe and repayre home: which custome was also in the old time obserued by the anci­ent Romanes, and likewise at this day by sundry other Pagans.

Now if it shall seeme straunge to any man,Why so small a number, as Paulo Diaz, had with him, was able to re­sist so huge an armie of the K. of Angola. that so few Portingall souldiours as Paulo Diaz retayneth there with him, and others of the Portingall nation, which traffick into the Realme, & relieue him with succours, being in number but three hundred at the most, ac­counting their slaues, and also the Malcontentes, the rebelles and fugitiues of Angola which dayly resort vn­to him, & amount not in al to the quantity of xv, thou­sand men, should be able to make so gallant a resistance against that innumerable rabble of Negroes, being sub­iect to the king of Angola, which are gathered there to­gether (as it is said) to the number of a Million of soules. I aunswere, that great reason may bee alleadged for the same. For the armie of the Negroes is all naked, and vt­terly destitute of all prouision and furniture for armour of defence: And as for their weapons of offence, they consist onely but of bowes and daggers (as I told you.) But our fewe Portingalles that are there, are well lap­ped in certaine iackets that are stuffed and basted with bombast, and stitched and quilted very soundly, which [Page 55] keepe their armes very safe, and their bodies downe­wardes as lowe as their knees: Their heades also are ar­med with cappes made of the same stuffe, which doo resist the shot of the arrow and the stroke of the dagger: Besides that, they are girt with longe swords, and some horsemen there are among them that carry speares for their weapons. Now you must vnderstande that one man on horsebacke, is of more worth then a hundred Negroes, because the horsemen do affray them greatly: & especially of those that do discharge guns and pee­ces of artillarie against them, they doo stande continu­ally in an extreame bodily feare. So that these few be­ing well armed, and cunningly and artificially ordered, must needes ouercome the other, though they be very many in number.

This kingdome of Angola, The Kingdom of Angola ve­ry populous. is full of people beyonde all credite: For euery man taketh as many wiues as hee listeth, and so they multiply infinitely: But they doe not vse so to do in the kingdome of Congo, which liueth after the manner of the Christians. And so Signor Odo­ardo did affirme and belieue, that the kingdome of An­gola had a Million of fighting men, by reason that euery man taking to him as many wiues as he woulde, begot many children, and likewise because euery man doeth willingly go to the warres in the seruice of his Prince.

This kingdome also is very rich in mines of Siluer, & most excellent Copper, The commo­dities of An­gola. and for other kindes of mettall there is more in this kingdome then in any other coun­trey of the world whatsoeuer. Fruitfull it is in all man­ner of foode, and sundry sortes of cattell, and specially for great heards of Kine. True it is, that this people do loue Dogs flesh better then any other meate: & for that [Page 56] that purpose they feede and fatten them, and then kill them, and sell them in their open shambles. It is con­stantly affirmed,A Dogge solde for 220. duc­cates. that a great dogge accustomed to the Bull was solde by exchaunge for xxij. slaues, which af­ter the rate of x. Duckates a poll, were worth in all 220. Duccates: in so high a price and account do they holde that Creature.

The moneyes that are vsed in Angola, are much dif­ferent from the Lumache of Congo: The money of Angola, for they of Angola do vse beades of glasse, such as are made in Venice as big as a Nut, and some of lesser quantity, and of diuers and sundry colours and fashions. These doe the people of Angola make, not onely to vse them for money, but also for an ornament of their men and women, to weare a­bout their neckes and their armes, and are called in their tongue Anzolos: but when they are threeded vpon a stringe lyke a payre of Beades, they call them Mizanga.

The King of Angola is by religion a Gentile,The Religion of Angola. and worshippeth Idoles, and so doo all the people in his kingdome. It is true, that hee hath greatly desired to become a Christian, after the example of the King of Congo. But because there hath not beene as yet any pos­sibility to sende Priestes vnto him, that might illuminate and instruct him, he remayneth still in darkenes. The foresaide Signor Odoardo tolde mee that in his time the king of Angola sent an Ambassadour to the King of Con­go, requesting that he would sende him some religious persons to inform him in the Christian religiō: but the King of Congo had none there that hee coulde spare, & therefore coulde sende him none. At this day, both these kinges doo trafficke together, and are in amity [Page 57] one with another, the king of Angola hauing now clee­red and discharged himselfe for the iniuries & slaugh­ters that were committed vpon those of Congo, and vp­on the Portingalles at Cabazo.

The language of the people of Angola is all one with the language of the people of Congo, The language of the people of Angola. because (as wee told you before) they are both but one kingdome. One­ly the difference betweene them is, as commonly it is betweene two nations that border one vpon another, as for example betweene the Portingalles and the Casti­lians, or rather betweene the Venetians and the Calabri­ans, who pronouncing their wordes in a diuers man­ner, and vttering them in seuerall sortes, although it be all one speech, yet do they very hardly vnderstand one another.

Wee haue signified vnto you heretofore, that the Bay of Cowes doth diuide the kingdome of Angola in the middest, and hitherto wee haue treated but of the one halfe thereof:The rest of the Kingdome of Angola descri­bed. Now we will describe vnto you the seconde parte of it, which lyeth from the said Bay of Cowes towardes the South. From this Bay then, to the black Cape called Capo Negro, Copo Negro. 1. The blacke Cape. by the coast of the Ocean they doe reckon two hundred & twenty miles of such country and soile as the former is, and possessed by ma­ny Lordes that are subiect to the king of Angola. From Capo Negro there runneth a line towardes the East, through the middest of the Mountaynes, that are called Monti Freddi, Monti Freddi 1. the cold mountaines. that is to say, the Cold Mountaines: which also in some certaine parts of them, that are higher then the rest, towardes the Equinoctiall are tearmed by the Portingalles Monti Neuosi, or Snowie Mountaines, and so endeth at the rootes of other Mountaynes that are [Page 58] called the Mountaines of Chrystall. (Out of these Snowie Mountains do spring the waters of the Lake Dumbea Zoc­che.) The moun­ainest of Chri­stall. This foresaid line from the mountaine of Christall draweth onwardes towardes the North through the Mountaines of Siluer, till you come to Malemba, where wee tolde you the kingdome of Congo was diuided, and parted the Riuer of Coari in the middest. And this is the Countrey possessed by the King of Angola, where­of I haue no more to say, then is already set downe, nei­ther of the qualities of his person, nor of his Court.

Chap. 8. Of the circuite of the Kingdome of Congo possessed by the King that nowe is, according to the foure borders aboue described.

BEginning therefore at the Riuer Co­anza, and drawing towardes the Equinoctiall 375. miles, you shal find the Riuer that they call Las Barreras Vermellias, The West cō ­taineth 375. miles. or the Redde Pittes, which are indeed the ragged ruines of cer­taine rockes worne by the sea, and when they fall downe doo shew themselues to be of a redde colour.The North 540. From thence by a direct line vpon the North, that which the King possesseth is 450. miles. [Page 59] And thē the said line diuiding it self towards the South passeth by the hilles of Christall (not those that we told you before did belong to Angola, The East 500, but others that are called by the same name) and so by the moun­tains of Salnitro, trauersing the Riuer Verbela at the roots of the Mountaines of Siluer it endeth at the Lake A­quelunda, The South. 360. which is the space of 500. miles. The fourth line runneth along the Riuer Coanza, which issueth out of the said Lake & contayneth 360. miles. So that the whole Realme now possessed by Don Aluaro the king of Congo is in compasse 1685. miles.The kingdom of Congo con­tayneth in cō ­passe, 1685. miles. But the breadth there­of beginneth at the mouth of the Riuer Zaire, where the point is, which in the Portingal speech is called Pa­draon, and so cutting the kingdome of Congo in the mid­dle, and crossing ouer the mountaines of the Sunne, and the mountaines of Christall, In breadth 600. miles. there it endeth, containing the space of 6 [...]0. miles, & within 150. miles, neere to the Riuer Nilus. Very true it is indeed, that in ancient time the predecessors of this Prince did raigne ouer many other countreyes thereaboutes, which in processe of time they haue lost: and although they bee now in the gouernement of others,The title or stile of the King of Congo yet doo the Kings of Con­go retaine still to this day the titles of those regions, as for example, Don Aluaro, king of Congo, and of Abundos, and of Matama, and of Quizama, and of Angola, and of Cacongo, and of the seauen kingdomes of Congere Amo­laza, and of the Pangelungos, and Lorde of the Riuer Zaire, and of the Anziquos, and Anziquana, and of Lo­ango.

Chap. 9. The sixe Prouinces of the kingdome of Congo, and first of the Prouince of Bamba.

THis kingdome is diuided into sixe Prouinces, that is to say, Bamba, Songo, Sundi, Pango, Batta & Pemba. The Prouince of Bamba, (which is the greatest and the richest) is gouerned by Don Sebastian Mani Bamba, The first pro­uince is Bam­ba, and the de­scription of it. Sebastian chief Gouernour of Bamba, and those that rule vnder him. cosin to the King Don Al­uaro last deceased, and it is situated vpon the sea coast, from the riuer Ambrize, vntill you come to the riuer Coanza towardes the South. This Don Sebastian hath vnder his dominion many Princes and Lordes, and the names of the greatest of them are these, Don Antonio Mani-Bamba, who is Lieuetenant and brother to Don Sebastian, and Mani-Lemba another, and Mani-Dandi, & Mani-Bengo, and Mani-Loanda, who is gouernour of the Island of Loanda, and Mani-Corimba, and Mani-Coanza, and Mani-Cazzanzi. All these doo gouerne all the sea coast but within lande, for that parte which belongeth to Angola, there are another people called the Ambun­dos, who dwelling on the borders of Angola are subiect [Page 61] to the saide Mani-Bamba, and they are these, Angazi, Chinghengo, Motollo, Chabonda, and many others of ba­ser condition.

Note, that this worde Mani signifieth a Prince or a Lord,Mani what it signifieth. and the rest of the word is the name of the coun­trey and Lordeshippe, where the Lorde ruleth. As for example, Mani-Bamba signifieth the Lord of the coun­trey of Bamba, & Mani-Corimba the Lorde of the coun­trey of Corimba, The Confines of Bamba, which is a parte of Bamba, and so like­wise of the rest. This Prouince of Bamba confineth with Angola, The country of Quizama. on the South, & vpon the East of it towardes the Lake Achelunda lyeth the country of Quizama, which is gouerned like a comon wealth, and is diuided among a number of Lordes, who in deed liuing at their owne libertie, doo neyther obey the King of Congo, nor the King of Angola. And to bee short, these Lords of Qui­zama, after they had a long time quarrelled with Paulo Diaz, yet at last they became his subiects, because they woulde auoide the yoake of the King of Angola, and by their good aid and assistance doth Paulo Diaz great­ly helpe himselfe against the said King of Angola.

Nowe the aforesaid Countrey of Bamba, Bamba the principall Prouince of all Congo. (as wee haue tolde you) is the principall Prouince of all the Realme of Congo, and in deed the very keye, and the buckler and the sworde, and the defence thereof, and (as it were) the frontier which opposeth it selfe against all their enemies. For it resisteth all the reuoltes and re­bellions of those quarters, and hath very valorous peo­ple in it, that are alwaies ready for to fight, so that they do continually keep their aduersaries of Angola in great awe: and if it happen at any time that their king stande in neede, they are alwaies at his commaunde to annoy [Page 62] the other countries whensoeuer. When neede requi­reth,Bamba yeeld­eth for a need 400000 men of warre hee may haue in Campe foure hundred thousande men of warre, and yet that number is but onely the sixt parte of the whole kingdome, though indeede it be the better parte and the stronger. The principall Citty of this Prouince lieth in the plaine which is betweene the riuer Loze and Ambrize, Panza the principall Ci­ty of Bamba. and is called Panza (which is a common name for euery towne.) There dwelleth the Lorde of the Prouince, and it is distant from the sea a hundred miles. In this Signorie also doo the hilles be­ginne,Mines of Sil­uer and other mettalles. where the mines of Siluer and other Mettalles are founde, and so stretch out towardes the kingdome of Angola. It is very rich: for vpon the coast of the sea there, they haue great store of the Lumache, which are vsed for Moneyes ouer all the kingdome of Congo: Be­sides, there is also a greater trafficke & Market for slaues, that are brought out of Angola, then in any place els. For there are yearely bought by the Portingalles aboue fiue thousand head of Negroes, which afterwardes they conueigh away with them, and so sell them into diuers parts of the worlde.

The people of this Prouince are in armes the most valiant of all the Kingdome of Congo. Valiāt, migh­tie & strong men in Bāba. They go armed like the Sclauonians, with long and large swords, that are brought them out of Portingal. There are among them very mighty men, that wil cleaue a slaue in the middest at one blowe, and cut of the head of a Bull at one stroke with one of those swordes. And (that which is more, and will peraduenture seeme incredible) one of these valiant men did beare vppon his arme a certaine vessell of wine, which was the fourth parte of a Butte, and might waigh about 325. pound, vntill it was cleane [Page 63] emptied. Moreouer, they do carry bow and arrowes, whereat they are very quicke and nimble, and withall their long Targets made of the Dants skin, whereof we told you before, when we made mentiō of the Anzichi.

The Creatures that are founde in this Prouince, are first the Elephantes,Certain crea­tures in Bam­ba Prouince. Elephantes. which doo breed ouer all the king­dome of Congo, but principally in the countrey of Bam­ba, because it aboundeth in Woodes, in pastures and in waters, more then any of the rest, by reason of the many riuers that runne through it. And therefore the countrey is (as it were) appropriated to nourishe and breede such a kinde of beaste, as is indeede of an vnrea­sonable bignesse.An Elephantes foot 4. spanne broad. For Signor Odoardo tolde me, that hee had oftentimes taken the measure of an Elephantes foot in the dust,You may find hereby what the bignes of the whole Ele­phant was▪ if you will vse the Arte of Proportion, as Pithagoras did by the foot of Hercules, Aul. Gelltus lib. 1. Cap. 10. & one of them was in plain Diameteer fower spannes broade. Whereby if you frame the whole cir­cle of the foote, accordingly you may by proportion finde out the bignesse of the whole bodie of the beast. This foot they cal Malo-Manzao that is to say, the Foot of an Elephant. And if in Portingal, in Italy, & in Germany, ther haue been seen in our times, any of these creatures that were far lesser in respect of the aforesaid hugenes, you must vnderstande that they were but young, and brought into those countreyes in their tender age, of purpose to make them tame.The Elephant liueth 150. yeares. But in these quarters they say that the Elephantes doe liue an hundred and fiftie yeares, and that vntill the middle of their age they con­tinue still in growing.An Elephants tooth of 200. waight. And to confirme this truth hee added, that he had seene and waighed diuerse of their teeth (which are not of home, as some thinke) and their waight amounted to 200. pounds a peece after the rate of xii. ounces to euery pound. In the language of Congo [Page 64] the Elephants tooth is called Mene-Manzao, that is to say, The tooth of an Elephant: and their young ones are called Moana-Manzao, that is, a young Elephant. Their eares are greater then the greatest Targattes that the Turks vse to weare, in length sixe spans, in shape like an Eg, & towards their sholders they grow to be narrow­er & sharper. With their ears, & with their tronke, and with their tayle, they beate away the flies that trouble them: yea and some haue leaft it in writing, that where they cannot reach with their tronke, with their eares, or with their taile, they will gather their skinne toge­ther, and so nip the poore flies to death betweene the wrincles.

They haue in their taile certaine hayres or bristles as bigge as rushes or broome-spriggs,Certain haires in the Ele­phants taile, very precious. of a shining black colour. The older they bee, the fayrer and stronger they be, and of great price among them. For the people of that countrey doe greatly esteeme them because the noble men and women of the kingdome of Angola, and of the Ambundi their neighbours doe vse to adorne and bedecke their neckes withal, & therefore do loue them, for that they are indeede very fayre and rare, and grow vpon so goodly a beast. They are very stronge, and like a twined corde, so that if a man shall striue to breake them asunder with both his handes, hee shall not bee able with all his force and strength to cracke them, but rather spoyle his handes with them. And for the cause lately rehearsed, many there are, which waiting for the Elephantes, when they ascend some steepe and narrowe way, doe come behinde them, and with very sharpe kniues cut of their tayles: the poor beast being not able in those straits to turne back to reuenge it selfe, not with [Page 65] his tronke to reach his enemie. And this they do, onely to haue those haires, which they sell for two or three flaues a peece. Other light & couragious persons there are, that trusting much to their swiftnes in running, do he in a waite, and set vpon the poore beastes behinde, whiles they are in feeding, and at one blow attempt to cut off their tayles, & so endeauour to saue themselues by running away in a rounde. For the greatnes of the beast is such, as outright it is very swift, because it ma­keth very large strides though in deede but slowe, and in the plaine is farre quicker then any lustie horse: but in turning rounde it looseth much time, and so the huntseman escapeth in safetie. And therefore many haue beene surprised and slaine by the Elephantes, that haue sought to escape from them by running away out­right.

Our Auncestors,An errour of ancient wri­ters. being not well enformed in these matters haue leaft in writing, that the Elephantes could not ly down vpō the ground, but that they vsed to lean themselues against a tree: which being before weake­ned or sawed in sunder by the hunters, both the Ele­phantes and the tree fel downe to the earth, and so were taken. But Signor Odoardo affirmed vpon his credit, that they lay downe vpon the ground, that they kneeled vp­on their knees, and that they woulde with both their fore-feete leape vpon the trees to feede on the leaues, & stoope downe to drink of the waters, that were in their caues, and that they had their iointes as other creatures haue, sauing that in some partes they do somewhat dif­fer from others: as for example, frō the hoofes of their fore-feete, vp to their shoulders, you shall not perceaue that they haue any more then two ioyntes. In their [Page 66] feeding: they vse to shake and roote vp the great trees with the force of their shoulders,The manner of the Elephāts feeding. and strength of their whole backes▪ But the smaller trees they take between both their teeth, and so bowe them and plucke them downe, that they may feede vpon the leaues of them: insomuch as sometimes they breake one of their teeth with so doing. And this is the cause why you shall find diuers of them in the fieldes that haue lost their teeth. They chawe their meate with their short teeth, which are not seene as their two long tuskes are: and they car­ry it to their mouth by their long Snout, or Tronke, which is to them in steed of an arme & a hand. The tip of their Tronke is fashioned & diuided into little slits, and (as it were) fingers, wherewith they will take vp very small thinges, as Nuttes, and Strawes, and Berries, & so reach them to their mouth, as I Philippo Pigafetta haue seene my selfe at Lisbone.

The Females of these creatures doe beare their broode in their wombe for the space of two yeares and no more:The Shee-Ele­phant. And forasmuch as the younge Elephant can­not so quickly bee brought vp, (for it groweth very slowly) the milke is kept from it, and so it waxeth apt to feede of it selfe. And therefore Mother Nature hath prouided that the Elephantes are not great with young, but from seauen yeares to seauen yeares.

Their skinne is harde beyond all credite.The Elephants skinne. For be­ing fower fingers thicke, it cannot bee pearced, no not with the shot of an Arcubuse. And Signor Odoardo re­ported, that with a little Gunne, which is called a Pe­treraa, one of them was stricken, without any wound making, but indeede he was grieuously bruised, so that he ranne away from that place all in a rage, the space of [Page 67] three daies iourney and there died, after hee had slaine certaine slaues that he met by the way.The manner of taking the Elephantes.

The people of that Countrey haue not the skill to tame these beastes. Whereby they might reape great commodity and profite, for carrying their stuffe from place to place for diuerse other good vses. But yet they take them; by digging certaine deepe trenches in the places, where they vse to pasture; which trenches are very narrowe at the bottome, and broade aboue, to the end the beast may not help himselfe, & leape out when he is fallen into them. These trenches they couer with Soddes of earth, and grasse, and leaues, because the beast shoulde not see their traine, but passing ouer them remaine there entrenched. Whereupon the Gentle­man beforenamed tolde mee, that hee had seene with his owne eyes a very straunge and admirable thing in Coanza, A straunge effect of Na­ture. namely, that a younge Elephant following his damme fell downe by chaunce into one of these pittes, and after that shee coulde not with all her skill and strength drawe him out of it, she buried him therein, and couered him with earth, with branches, and with bowes, insomuch as she filled the pit vp to the toppe, to the ende that the hunters shoulde not enioy her calfe, choosing rather to kill it her selfe, then to leaue it to the mercie of the cruell huntsemen. This louing and kind mother, not fearing the people (that stood round about her, & shouted against her, & threatned her with sun­dryweapons, & vttered straunge clamours and noyses to affray her, & cast many fiers at her) but assuring her selfe in her owne stronge and valiant nature, did labour and toyle from morning till night, that she might draw her calfe out of the pitte: and when shee founde that [Page 68] it was not possible for her to atchieue what she desired, then shee couered it in manner as wee haue tolde you.

The Elephant is a very gentle beast, and trusteth greatly in his natural strength. He feareth nothing, nor hurteth any man that doth not trouble him:The nature of the Elephant. and haun­teth neere to mens houses without doing any harme at all. If he espie men that go in his walke, he wil not med­dle with them, vnlesse they seeke to molest him: sauing that sometimes peraduenture hee will gently with his snowte hoyse them vpwardes into the ayre, whom he meeteth withall in his way; and that is all the hurt hee will doo vnto them. These Elephantes doo greatly de­light in waters: and if a man be desirous to see them, his best way is to lie somewhere nigh to the Riuers, and Lakes, where they vse to haunt about noone tide, to drinke, to refresh themselues, and to bathe their bodies in the water: for there they will stande vp to their bel­lies, and all the rest of their bodie, that is aboue the wa­ter, they will wash all ouer with the water that they snuffe vp into their snout for that purpose. And be­cause there are so many foords & pastures (as is said) in the kingdome of Congo, therefore is there very great store of these creatures in that countrey. For Signor O­doardo affirmed, that in the way betweene Cazanze, & Loanda, in a little grassie valley hee had seene about a hundred of them in a company, olde and young that followed their dammes: and these were the first young ones that euer hee saw till that day. And herewithall you must vnderstand, that they vse to go together in heardes, as Kine, and Camelles, and other such like gen­tle Creatures doo, and not alone like Lions and other such wilde beastes. Now the reason why this country [Page 69] aboundeth so in Iuory, is easy to be yeelded. For so many Elephantes being bredde in that Region, they made no account of that commodity in times past: but onely af­ter that the Portingalles began to trafficke with those countreyes, it grewe in estimation: and so hauing ga­thered together in so many ages an infinite quantity thereof, which they found in their fieldes, they haue sould them till this day at a very good penniworth.

It is not knowen,Rinoceros. whether there be in that countrey any other beast that is so big as an Elephant is, nor whe­ther there breed therein any Rinoceros, which is a Crea­tures as bigge indeede as the Elephant, and in India is cal­led a Bada. But yet there are brought into the countries of the Anzichi some of their hornes that growe vpon their noses, that are both of great value & estimation, & also vsed for the help of diuers diseases. So that it is very credible and likely, that there are some of them to bee founde in those quarters.

There are in the Region of the Anzichi Lions also, like the Lions that breed in other partes of the worlde,Lyons. but they doo not vse to haunt the Region of Bamba: But in Bamba there are very great store of Tigres, which are of the very same shape that those in Florence are,Tygres. which Signor Odoardo saw there, and testified to be very Tygres indeed. He tolde mee also of a notable cu­stome which they haue: And that is, that they will not set vpon any men that are white, but onely such as are blacke: And it hath beene found, that when the white and the blacke haue slept together in the night time, they haue slayne the blacke to deuoure them, and spa­red the white. When they are hungry they will bee so bolde as to fetch cattell euen out of the yardes that [Page 70] are about the houses without any feare at all, when they cannot finde any victuailes abroade in the fieldes. They are very daungerous and hurtfull to all kindes of Creatures whatsoeuer they be, and in that language they are called Engoi. They are as fierce and cruell beastes as the Lion, and roare as the Lion doth. They are also altogether like the Lion, sauing onely in the co­lour of their haire; for the Tygre is spotted, but the Lyon is all of one colour.The manner of taking the tame Tygres. They vse to take and kill these Ty­gres after diuers manners. For besides that, which hath beene before spoken, they poyson them with Sublimate or some other venome, mingled with flesh which is laid for them. Or els they tie young Goates at certaine lines made like snares, and fastned about the stocke of a tree, so that when the beast commeth to her pray, the en­gine openeth it selfe, and the more the beast striueth withall, the more it is intangled, and so at last is hanged therein. Another way they haue to kill them, that is with arrowes, with Iauelins, and with Arcubuses. It is a Creature very harmeful, both to the Negroes them­selues, and also to their flockes of sheepe and heards of cattell.A tame Ty­ger. Notwithstanding Signor Odoardo tolde me, that he had gotten one of them, that was fifteene dayes old, and he brought it vp with Goates milke: which be­ing afterwardes growen bigger would followe him like a dogge: and although it were very tame, yet it would not willingly suffer any other to touch it besides his maister. He woulde also roare mightily, and when he was angry, his eies wold looke very terribly & fearfully. But in processe of time this Tygre killed a Dogge, belong­ing to the house, and also a Zebra, that were very [...] to their maister, and thereupon, perceiuing [...] [Page] [Page]

[figure]

[Page 73] a beast it was, hee slewe it with an Arcubuse-shot. He reported moreouer, that the Mostacchios of the Ty­gre are helde in that Region to be mortall poyson: for being giuen in meates, it procureth a man to die, as it were in a madnesse: And therefore the king doth pu­nish all those that bring him a Tygres skinne without the Mostacchios.

There breedeth likewise in this Countrey another Creature,The Zebra▪ which they call a Zebra, commonly founde also in certaine Prouinces of Barbary and Africa: which although it be altogether made like a great Mule, yet is not a Mule indeed, for it beareth young ones. It hath a most singular skinne, and peculiar from all other crea­tures. For from the ridge of the chine downe towards the bellie, it is straked with rowes of three colours, blacke, white, and browne Bay, about the breadth of three fingers a peece, and so meet againe together in a circle, euery rowe, with his owne colour. So that the necke, and the head; and the Mane (which is not great) and the eares, and all the legges are so interchaunged with these colours, and in such manner and order, as without all faile, if the first strake beginne with white, then followeth the second with blacke, & in the thirde place the Bay: & so another course beginning in white endeth still in Bay. And this rule is generally and infal­libly obserued ouer all the body. The tayle is like the tayle of a Mule, of a Morell colour, but yet it is well co­loured, and hath a glistring glosse. The feet like the feet of a Mule, and so are the hooffes. But touching the rest of her carriage and qualities, she is very lusty and plea­saunt as a horse: and specially in going, and in running she is so light & so swift that it is admirable. In somuch [Page 74] as in Portingale and in Castile also, it is commonly vsed (as it were for a prouerbe) As swift as a Zebra, when they will signifie an exceeding quickenes. These creatures are all wilde, they breede euery yeare, and are there in such aboundance that they are innumerable. If they were made tame, they woulde serue to runne and to drawe for the warres, and for many other good vses, as well as the best horses that are. So that Mother Nature seemeth to haue sufficiently prouided in euery country for the commodity and necessity of man, with diuers sortes of Creatures, of nourishments, and temperature of ayre, to the ende hee shoulde want nothing. And therefore they hauing no horses at all in the whole Kingdome of Congo, nor any skill to vse their oxen to the yoke, or to the packsaddle, that they might ey­ther be drawen or carryed, nor to tame their Zebraes with bridle and saddle, or any other way to take the be­nefite of their beastes, that might transport them from place to place:The manner of the carry­ing of the Moci-Conghi. Euen very necessity hath taught them to vse men in steed of labouring cattel. For either they lay thēselues al along in certain Litters (as it were) or els set themselues vpright, with shadows ouer them to keepe them from the Sunne, and so they cause themselues to be carried too and fro, by their slaues, or by other men that for wages are alwaies ready at Poste-houses to that purpose. They that meane to iourney with speede, do take with them many slaues, and when the first num­ber are weary, then do the seconde number vndertake the burden, and so successiuely chaunge one after ano­ther, as the Tartarians and Persians vse to do with their horses: and these men being thus accustomed to these labours, (and so often chaunging) will go as fast, as any [Page]

[figure]

[Page] [Page 77] [Page]

[figure]

[Page 79] [Page]

[figure]

[Page 81] [Page]

[figure]

[Page 83] [Page]

[figure]

[Page] [Page]

[figure]

[Page 87] Postilion gallop. Of all which fashions of carrying or go­ing in iourney, we haue set down the pictures as also of the Zebra, of the apparel both of the men & women, of the souldiers, and of the Military Instrumentes or Cor­nets.

There are also to bee founde in this countrey cer­taine other foure-footed beastes,The Dantes somewhat lesse then Oxen, of colour red, with hornes like Goats horns, which are very smooth and glistering, and enclining to black: whereof they make diuers prety knackes, as they doe likewise of the Buffes hornes. They haue their heades and their haires, like the heads and haires of Oxen: and their skinnes are of great estimation: & therefore they are carried into Portingall, and from thence into Germa­ny, to be dressed, and then they are called Dantes. The king of Congo is very desirous to haue some men that had skill to cleanse them and dresse them, and to make them fit for vse, to the end hee might employ them for Armour of defence. And yet those nations doo alrea­dy vse them for shieldes and Targats: and do find that they will resist the blowe of a weapon, and especially the shot of an Arrow. They kill them with Arcubuses and with arrowes. But if they doe espy the huntsman, they wil set vpon him, and being by nature very fierce, and couragious, they will so knocke him and thumpe him with their feete and their Muzzle (because they cannot do him any harme with their hornes) that they wil leaue him either halfe deade or starke dead. There is also an infinite number of wilde Buffes, Wilde Buffes, Wilde Asses. that go wan­dring about the deserts in the kingdoms of the Anzichi, and wilde Asses likewise, which the Greekes call Ona­gri.

[Page 88] There are besides these, other beasts called Empalan­ga, Empalanga▪ which are in bignesse and shape like Oxen, sauing that they holde their necke and heade aloft, and haue their hornes broade and crooked, three handbreadthes long, diuided into knots, and sharp at the endes, where­of they might make very faire Cornets to sound withall: and although they liue in the forrests, yet are they not noysome nor harmefull. The skinnes of their neckes are vsed for shoo-soles, and their flesh for meate. They might likewise bee brought to drawe the plough, and doo good seruice in any other labour, and tilling of the ground. Moreouer they feed great heards of Kine, and tame Oxen, Other fruitful Cattell. tame Hogges and wilde Boares, flockes of Sheepe and Goates. Signor Odoardo affirmed, that the Goates and the Sheepe doo bring forth two, and three, & foure lambes or kids at a time, and two when they haue fewest, and neuer one alone at any time. And because their pasture is so fat, they do all sucke, and milke their owne dammes, which hee proued himselfe to be true in his owne house, where hee had very great store of that Cattell.

There are Wolues also which loue the oyle of Palmes beyonde all measure,Wolues. and haue a great sent: a propertie that Virgile attributeth to Dogges, Odora Canum vis, The smelling sent of Dogges. They will smell this oyle a farre off, and steale it in the night time out of their houses of strawe, and sometimes from those that carry it by the way, whiles the poore soules doe rest themselues and sleepe. The oyle (as shall be tolde you) is made of the Palme tree: it is thicke and harde like Butter. And it is a maruell to see, how these Wolues do take a bottle that is full of this liquor betweene their teeth, & so cast it [Page 89] on their shoulders and run away withall, as our Wolues here doo with a Sheepe. There are very great store of Foxes, Foxes. that steale Hennes as our Foxes doo. And further in this country of Bamba, there is an innumerable quan­tity of hunting game,Hunting game. as Stagges, Fallow-Deere, Roebucks, and Gazelles, whereof he affirmed that he had seene ex­ceeding great heardes, as also of Conies and Hares, be­cause there were no hunters to kill them.

In the Region of Pemba there are many wilde Ciuet-Cattes, In Pembae, Ci­uet Cattes, which the Portingales call Algazia, and some of these the people of that countrey had made tame, that they might inioy their Ciuet, in the smell whereof they doo greatly delight. But this was before the Portingals did trafficke with those Countryes. And in Manibatta there are caught many Sables, In Batta, Sa­bles. with very white hayres and exceeding fine, called Incire: but no man may weare these skinnes, vnlesse the Prince permit him so to do: for it is helde in great estimation, and euery Sa­ble is worth a slaue. Towardes the Anzichi they catch Marterns also,In Anziguâ Marternes. wherewith they apparrell themselues, as in due place we will note vnto you.

Apes, In Sogno, [...] and Monkeyes. Monkeyes, and such other kinde of beastes, small and great of all sortes there are many in the Regi­on of Sogno, that lyeth vpon the Riuer Zaire. Some of them are very pleasant and gamesome, and make good pastime, and are vsed by the Lordes there for their re­creation and to shew them sport. For although they be vnreasonable Creatures, yet will they notably coun­terfait the countenances, the fashions, & the actions of men. In euery one of these Regions abouenamed, there are some of the aforesaid Creatures, in some places mo, and in some places fewer.

[Page 90] Of Adders, and Snakes in these countries there bree­deth a certaine kinde,Adders and Snakes of a huge scantling that in respect of our countryes is very straunge, and of an excessiue greatnesse. For you shall finde some that are xxv. spanne long, and fiue span broade: and the bellie and the mouth so large, that they can swallow and receiue into their bellie a whole Stag, or any other creature of that bignesse. And it is cal­led that is to say a great Water-Adder. The Author doth not set downe the name. It wil go forth of the water vp to the land to prey for his victuails, and then returne into the riuers againe, and so it liueth in both the Elements. It wil get it self vp vpon the bows & braunches of trees, and there watch the cattell that feed thereaboutes, which when they are come neere vnto it, presently it will fall vpon them, and wind it selfe in many twines about them, and clappe his tayle on their hinder partes, and so it strayneth them and biteth so ma­ny holes in them, that at last it killeth them. And then it draweth them into some woode or other solitary place, where it deuoureth them at pleasure, skinne, hornes, hooffes and all. Now it falleth out, that when it is thus full, and (as it were) great with so monstrous a meale, it becommeth almost drunke & very sleepie, so that any child may kil it. And in this sort wil it remaine full & satisfied for the space of 5. or 6. daies together, & then returne againe to prey. These Adders do change their skinnes in their ordinarie seasons, yea and some­times after they haue eaten so monstrously, and the said sloughes, when they are found, are gathered vp and re­serued for a shew of so vnmeasurable a Creature. These Adders are also greatly esteemed by the Pagan Negroes, for they do vse to rost them, and eate them for meat, & make more account of them then they doo of Hennes, [Page 91] or any such delicate flesh. They find great store of them when they haue occasion to burne their thicke woods: for there they shall haue them lying on the ground, ro­sted with the fire.

Besides these there are Vipers also,Vipers. well knowne vnto that people. Which Vipers are so venemous, that such as are bitten by them doe die within the space of xxiiii. houres: But the Negroes are acquainted with certaine hearbes that will heale their woundes.

There are also certaine other Creatures,Another strange crea­ture. which be­ing as big as Rams, haue wings like Dragons, with long tailes and long chappes, and diuerse rowes of teeth, & feede vpon raw flesh. Their colour is blew and greene, their skinne bepaynted like scales, and two feete they haue but no more. The Pagan Negroes, do vse to wor­shippe them as Goddes, and at this day you may see di­uers of them that are kept for a maruaile. And because they are very rare, the Chiefe Lordes there doo curi­ously preserue them, and suffer the people to worship them, which tendeth greatly to their profite, by reason of the giftes and oblations which the people offer vnto them.

There are there also to be found Chameleons, Chamelions. which haue fower feete, and breede vpon the rockes, and liue of the winde and the aire, of the bignesse and likenesse of an Efte, with a sharpe heade, and a tayle like a sawe. They are for the most parte of the colour of the skie, but somewhat more duskie and greenish, and if you stand to looke a while vpon them, you shall see them chaunge themselues into diuers colours. They dwell much vpon high rockes and trees, to the ende they may take aire, wherewith they are nourished.

[Page 92] Other serpentes there are that are venemous, that carrie vpon the tippe of their taile a certaine little roundell like a bell,A straunge Serpent. which ringeth as they go, so as it may be hearde. It may be it was there set by nature, of purpose, that people should beware of them, and it is founde by experience that these belles and the heades of the serpents are very good remedies against an ague, and against the trembling of the hart. These kindes and sortes of lande-Creatures are to be founde in these re­gions, besides others also that are commonly to be had in other countries.

It resteth now, that we speake somewhat touching Birdes, The Eastrich. and first of all of the Eastriche, because it is big­ger then all the rest. These Eastriches are found in those partes of Sundi and of Batta, that are towardes the Mu­zambi. The young Eastriches doo spring out of their egges, being warmed and disclosed by the eye & heate of the Sunne. Their feathers are vsed in steede of En­signes and Banners in warre,Peacocks. mingled with some plumes of the Peacocke, and are fashioned in the likenesse of a shadowe against the Sunne. And forasmuch as I am fallen into the speech of Peacockes, I must tell you by the way, that in the partes, of Angola, there are Peacockes brought vp priuately in a certaine woode that is com­passed about with walles: and the king will not suffer any other bodie to keepe those birdes but onely him­selfe, because they are for the Royall Ensignes, as I tolde you before. And it is read in auncient histories of A­lexander the Great, that he did also priuiledge this Birde, at such time as he first saw it in Europe.

There are also Indie-Cockes and Hens, and Geese, and Duckes of all sortes both wilde and tame:Fowles of diuers sorts. Partriches so [Page 93] many as children take them with ginnes. Other birdes they haue likewise, as Pheasantes, which they call Gallig­noles, Pigeons, Birds of prey. Turtles, and of these small birdes called Becca fichi an infinite number. Birdes of prey, as Eagles-Royall, Faulcons, Gerfaulcons and Sparhaukes, and others, great store, which notwithstanding the people neuer vse to hauke withall. Birdes of the sea, as Pellicanes (for so the Portingalles do call them) white and great,Birdes of the sea. which swimme vnder the water, and haue their throates so wide, that they will swallow a whole fish at once. This bird hath so good a stomacke, and naturally so hot, that it easily digesteth the fish that it swalloweth whole, and the skinne of it is so hoat, that the people of that coun­trey do vse to weare them, and to warme their colde stomackes withall, and therefore make great reckoning of them.

There are many white Herons and Gray Bittours, Other kinds of foule. that feede in the washes there, and are called Royall Birdes. Other Fowles there are of the likenesse of a Crane, with a red bill and redde feete, as bigge as Storkes, and their feathers for the most part redde and white, and some darke graye. Goodly birdes they are to looke too, and the people of the countrey doo call them Flemminges, because they doo much resemble them, and are good meat to eate.

They haue Parrattes of gray colour,Parrats. Birdes of mu­sicke. great and very talkatiue: & others of greene colour, but they are little ones & not so talkatiue: They haue likewise certaine smal little birds, which they call Birds of Musicke, and yet greater thē the Canarie Birds, of feather & bill red: some greene, with their feet & bill only black: some all white: some gray or dunne: some all blacke, and this kinde is [Page 94] more sweet in their notes then all the rest aforenamed: for you woulde thinke that they talked in their singing. Others there are of diuers colours: but they do all sing in sundrie sorts, so that the chiefe Lords of those coun­treyes, from auncient times to this day, haue continu­ally kept them in cages, and greatly esteemed them for their song.

Chap. 10. Of the Prouince of Sogno, which is the Countrey of the Riuer Zaire, and Loango.

THis Countrey is bounded with the Riuer Ambrize, The second Prouince Sog­no, and the de­scription thereof. towardes the North in seauen degrees and a halfe, and so tra­uersing the Riuer Lelunda, and the Ri­uer Zaire it endeth at the Rockes called Barreuras Vermellias, that is to say, the Redde pittes, which are in the borders of the Kingdome of Loango. In the middest of this Prouince there is a certaine Territory, Sogno the chief towne of this Prouince. called by the same name Sogno, where the Gouernour of the Countrey dwelleth. The chiefe Lordes that rule this Prouince are called Mani-Sogno, that is Princes of Sogno, and are commonly of the blood Royall. The Prince that gouerneth there at this day is [Page 95] called Dō Diego Mani-Sogno. He hath vnder his dominiō many other petty Lords,Don Diego chiefe Gouer­nour of Sogno, & those that rule vnder him. & other prouinces, that in olde time were free and liued by themselues, as the people of Mombalas, situate somwhat neere to the Cittie of Congo, which are now subiect to this gouernement. And on the other side of the Riuer Zaire towardes the North is the Prouince of Palmar, that is to say of Palmes, because there is great store of Palme trees growing therein. O­ther Lordes there are, that border vpon the King of Loango, who was sometime subiect to the King of Con­go, but in processe of time he became a free Lord, and now professeth himselfe to be in amity with the king of Congo, but not to be this vassall. The people that are vn­der these Lords in those borders, are called the Bramas: and they reach within land,The Bramas. vnder the Equinoctiall line towardes the East to the boundes of Anzicana, all along the Mountaines which diuide them from the Anzichi vpon the North. They are called by the people of Loan­go, Congreamolal, because they were subiect to Congo.

In this Countrey of Loango there are many Elephants and great store of Iuory which they doo willingly ex­chaunge for a little iron,The commo­dities of Sogno so that for the naile of a shippe (be it neuer so small) they will giue a whole Elephantes tooth. The reason thereof is either because there grow­eth no iron in that place, or els they haue not the skill to get it out of the mines where it groweth: But all the iron they can get they employ for heading of their ar­rowes, and their other weapons, as we told you, when we spake of the Bramas.

They make great store of cloth of the Palme trees,The manner of the life of the inhabi­tants. whereof wee made mention before: but these are lesser and yet very fine. They haue greate aboundance of [Page 96] Kine and of other cattell before named. They are in Religion Pagans: their apparell after the fashion of the people of Congo: They maintaine warre with their bordering neighbours, which are the Anzichi and the inhabitants of Anzicana, & when they enterprise warre against the Anzichi, then they craue aide of the people of Congo, and so they remaine halfe in freedome, and halfe in daunger of others. They worship what they list, and hold the Sunne for the greatest God, as though it were a man, and the Moone next, as though it were a woman. Otherwise euery man chooseth to himselfe his owne idol, and worshippeth it after his owne plea­sure. These people would easily embrace the Christi­an Religion: For many of them, that dwell vpon the borders of Congo haue beene conuerted to Christen­dome: and the rest, for want of Priestes and of such as should instruct them in true religion, do remaine stil in their blindnes.

Chap. 11. Of the third Prouince called Sundi.

THis Prouince of Sundi is the nee­rest of all to the Citty of Congo, called Citta di San-Saluatore, The third pro­uince Sundi, & the description thereof: the Citty of Saint Sauiours, and be­ginneth about 40. miles distant from it, and quite out of the ter­ritory thereof, and reacheth to [Page 97] the riuer Zaire, and so ouer the same to the other side where the Caduta or Fall is, which wee mentioned be­fore: and then holdeth on vpwardes on both sides to­wards the North, bordering vpon Anzicana and the An­zichi. Towardes the South it goeth along the said riuer Zaire, vntill you come to the meeting of it with the Ri­uer Bancare, and all along the bankes thereof, euen to the rootes of the mountaine of Christall. The chiefe towne of Sun­di. In the bounds of the Prouince of Pango, it hath her principall Terri­tory, where the Gouernour lyeth, who hath his name from the Prouince of Sundi, and is seated about a daies iourney neere to the Fall of the Riuer, towardes the South.

This Prouince is the chiefest of all the rest,This prouince of Sundi is alwaies gouer­ned by the heire apparent of the K. of Congo. and (as it were) the Patrimony of all the kingdome of Congo: and therefore it is alwaies gouerned by the Kinges eldest Sonne, and by those Princes that are to succeede him. As it fell out in the time of their first Christian King, that was called Don Iohn: whose eldest sonne, that was Gouernour here succeeded him, and was called Don Alfonso. And euer sithence, the Kinges of Congo haue successiuely continued this custome, to consigne this Gouernement to those Princes which are to succeede in the kingdome: As did the king that nowe is called Don Aluaro, who was in this Gouernment before Don Aluaro the King his father died,In al the king­dome of Con­go, no man hath any thing of his owne whereof hee may dispose, or [...] and was called Mani-Sundi.

And here by the way you must note, that in all the Kingdome of Congo there is not any person, that posses­seth any proper goodes of his owne, whereof hee may dispose, and leaue to his heyres: but all is the Kinges, & he distributeth all offices, all goodes, and all landes, to [Page 98] whomsoeuer it pleaseth him. Yea and to this law, euen the Kinges owne sonnes are subiect. So that if any man do not pay his tribute yearely (as hee ought) the King taketh away his Gouernement from him, and gi­ueth it to another. As it happened to the king that now liueth, who at the time that Signor Odoardo was at the Courte, being of his owne nature very liberall, and bountifull beyond measure, and one that bestowed much vpon his seruants, could not discharge those im­positions that the king had layed on him. Whereupon he was by the king depriued of his reuenews, of his go­uernement, and of his royall fauour, that is to say in that language, hee was Tombocado, as we will declare more at full in the seconde part of this discourse.

Many Lords there are that are subiect to the Gouer­nour or Sundi. The people do trafficke with their neigh­bour Countries,The manner of ye life of Sū ­di inhabitants felling and bartering diuers things. As for example, falt, & clothes of sundry colours, brought from the Indies, and from Portingale, and Luma [...] to serue for their coine. And for these commodities they doo exchaunge cloth of Palme trees, and Iuory, and the skinnes of Sables and Marternes, and certaine girdles wrought of the leaues of Palme trees, which are great­ly esteemed in those partes.

There groweth in these countries great store of Chri­stall, and diuers kinds of mettall: but Iron they loue a­boue all the rest, saying that the other mettalles are to no vse: for with Iron they can make kniues, and wea­pons, and hatchers, and such like instruments, that are necessary and profitable for the vse of mans nature.

Chap. 12. Of the fourth Prouince called Pango.

THe Prouince of Pango in aunci­ent time was a free kingdome,The fourth prouince Pan­go, and the de­scription ther­of. that was gouerned of it selfe, & bordereth on the North vppon Sundi, on the South vpon Batta, on the West vpon the Countie of Congo, and on the East, vpon the mountaines of the Sunne. The principal Territory,Pāgo the chief town of this Prouince. where the Gouernours dwel­ling is, hath the same name that the Prouince hath, viz. Pango. It standeth vpon the Westerne side of the Ri­uer Barbela, and in olde time was called Pangue-lungos, and in time afterwardes the worde was corrupted and chaunged into Pango. Through the middest of this Prouince runneth the riuer Berbela, which fetcheth his originall from the great Lake (whence the riuer Nilus also taketh his beginning) and from another lesser Lake called Achelunda, and so dischargeth it selfe into Zaire. [Page 100] And although this be the least Countrey of all the rest, yet doth it yeeld no lesse tribute then the rest.

This Prouince was conquered after the Countrey of Sundi, and made subiect to the Princes of Congo: and is now all one with it, both in speech and manners, nei­ther is there any difference at all betweene them.Don Francisco chiefe Gouer­nour of Pango The present Gouernour thereof is called Don Francesco Ma­ni-Pango, and is descended from the most auncient no­bilitie of all the Lordes of Congo: and in all consultati­ons touching the State he is sent for, because he is nowe an olde man, and of great wisedome. For hee hath re­mained in the gouernment of this region for the space of fiftie yeares, and no man euer complained of him, neither did the king at any time take his gouernement from him.

The trafficke of this Prouince is like the trafficke of Sundi.

Chap. 13. Of the fift Prouince called Batta.

THe boundes of this Prouince are towards the North, The fift Prouince Batta & the descrip­tion thereof. the Countrey of Pango: on the East it taketh quite ouer the Riuer Barbela, and reacheth to the Mountaines of the Sunne, and to the foote of the [Page 101] Mountaines of Sal-Nitre. And on the South from the said Mountains, by a line passing through the meeting of the riuers Barbela and Cacinga, to the mountaine Brus­ciato, that is to say Scorched.

Within these boundes is Batta contayned,Batta the chiefe towne of all Batta. and the Principall Cittie, where the Prince dwelleth, is likewise called Batta. In auncient time it was called Aghirimba, but afterwardes the word was corrupted, and it is now called Batta. It was in old time a very strong and a great Kingdome, & voluntarily of it selfe, without any war it ioyned it selfe with the kingdome of Congo, peraduen­ture because there was some dissention among their Lords:The Preemi­nence of the Gouernour of Batta. and therefore it hath more preheminence then the rest of the Prouinces of the kingdome of Congo, in priuiledges and liberties. For the Gouernment of Batta is alwaies assigned to one, that is of the bloode of the Kings of that countrey at their choise and pleasure, ha­uing no more respect to one then to another, so that he be of the stocke and bloud Royall, neyther to the eldest sonne nor to the second. Neither yet goeth this Go­uernement by inheritaunce, but the king of Congo (as is told you before) doth dispose it at his own pleasure to whō he thinketh best, to the end they shold not vsurpe it by way of succession, or by rebellion. Hee dwelleth neerer the king then any other Gouernour or Lorde of the kingdom of Congo, & is the secōd person therin, nei­ther may any man gainsay his arguments & reasons, as they may any of the rest, for it is so decreede among them. Nowe if the line of the king of Congo should chaunce to faile, so that there were none of that blood to succeed,Don Pedro chiefe Gouer­nour of Batta. the succession shall fall vpon the gouernour of Batta. Hee that now gouerneth there, is called Don [Page 102] Pedro Mani-Batta.

Sometimes he eateth at the kinges owne table, but yet in a baser seat then the kinges seat is, and that also not sitting, but standing, which is not graunted to any other Lord of Congo, no nor to the sons of the king him­selfe. His Court and his traine is little lesse then the Court & traine of the king of Congo. For he hath Trom­pets and Drummes and other instrumentes going before him, as becommeth a Prince, and by the Portingalles he is commonly called the Prince of Batta, because (as it is said) if the succession shoulde faile in the bloode of the kinges of Congo, the empire of the whole kingdome must light vpon some one of this stocke.

Hee doth holde continuall warres with the Pagans that border vpon him: and hee is able to gather toge­ther about 70. or 80. thousand fighting men. And be­cause hee doth still mayntaine warre with the people that are next him,The K. of Cō ­go wil not suf­fer any natural borne subiect in Congo, to haue an Arcu­buse. he hath liberty graunted vnto him to entertaine Arcubusiers, that shall bee of his owne natu­rall subiectes. For the king of Congo will not suffer any other Gouernour of any other Prouinces, nor any of their children, to haue any Arcubusiers, that are borne within their Countrey, but onely the Portingalles. Sig­nor Odoardo demaunding once of the King, why he did not giue leaue to his other Gouernours to retaine shot about them: the King aunswered, that if peraduenture they should rebell against him with a thousand, or two thousande Arcubusiers, he should not haue any possi­bility to make them resistance.

And forasmuch as wee haue told you,The reason why the K. of Congo permit­teth Mani-Batta to haue Arcubusiers in his Prouince. that the King hath graunted licence, onely to the prince of Batta, to entertaine Arcubusiers in his owne countrey, it is fitte [Page 103] you should vnderstand, that hee doth it vpon very ne­cessary occasion. For towardes the East of Batta, be­yond the mountaines of the Sunne, and of Sal-Nitre, vp­on the bankes of the East and West of the riuer Nilus, & in the borders of the Empire of Mohenhe-Muge there liueth a nation,The Giac [...] which by the people of Congo, are called Giaquas, but in their own language they are called Agag: Very fierce they are and warlicke, much giuen to fight and pillage, and make continuall inroades into the Countries neere adioyning, and sometimes among the rest into the Prouince of Batta. So that this Countrey must needes be in continuall Armes, and stande vpon good guarde, and maintaine Arcubusiers to defende themselues from them.

The Prince of Batta hath many Lordes vnder him: and the naturall people of this Prouince are called Mon­sobos, The conditi­ons of the people of Batta. and their language is well vnderstoode by the in­habitants of Congo. They are farre more rude and ru­sticall then the Moci-Conghi, and the slaues that are brought from thence, doo proue more obstinate and stubborne, then those that come from other Coun­tries.

Their trafficke is the same, that the trafficke of the other countreyes are,Their traffick. whereof we haue last intreated. And the profite which the king receyueth from Batta, amounteth to double asmuch, as he receiueth out of a­ny two of the other Prouinces before mentioned.

Chap. 14. Of the sixt and last Prouince called Pemba.

THe Prouince of Pemba is seated in the heart and middle of the King­dome of Congo, The sixt Pro­uince Pemba, and the situa­tion thereof. compassed and comprised within the boundes before described, whose Gouer­uernour is called Don Antonio Mani-Pemba, Don Antonio cheife Gouer­nor of Pemba. seconde sonne to King Don Aluaro, that dead is, and brother to the king that raygneth at this present. And forasmuch as his father did loue him dearely, he assigned vnto him this Gouernement, because he knew not what better thing to giue him, sauing the Realme it selfe: which in deed he would willingly haue bestowed on him, for that he was more like vnto him in quality & nature then his el­dest son was. But it would not be by reason of the lawe of the Kingdome, which wold not haue yeelded there­vnto.

This countrey is the very Center and middest of all the state of Congo, and the originall of all the auncient Kings, and the Territorie where they were borne, and the chiefe and principall seat of all the other Prouinces [Page 105] and Principalities. And therefore the chiefe and roy­all Citty of all that Empire is assigned to this Prouince,The chiefe Cittie of all Congo is situate in this pro­uince of Pēba, whereof we will heareafter deliuer you a full informa­tion. The Gouernour of Pemba dwelleth in a Terri­torie of the same name, situate at the foote of the Scor­ched Mountaine, along the Riuer Loze, which riseth out of the Lake, and runneth through the Region of Bamba into the sea.

The Courtiers, and Lordes, and seruitors belong­ing to the king of Congo, The Courtiers &c. dwel for the most part in Pemba. haue their goods and possessi­ons, and reuenewes in this Prouince, because it is nee­rest to the Court, & very conuenient for the conueigh­ing of their victuailes, and their other stuffe vnto the Court. Some of these Lordes, in that parte specially, that bordereth vpon the aforesaid Prouince of Bamba, haue much a doo to keep fight and defende themselues from the people of Quizama, because they are neerest vnto them. For this people (as wee tolde you) did rebell against the king of Congo, and reuolted from him, and doe professe that they will bee at libertie, and go­uerned of themselues.

And here will we end the first booke,Conclusion of this booke. which con­sisteth of the description of the kingdome of Congo in generall, and of his borders, and in particular of all the sixe Prouinces thereof. Now it remayneth that wee proceede forwarde to the second booke:The contents of the seconde booke. Wherein we will treate of the situation of the Cittie of Congo, and of the Territorie therevnto belonging, of the first chri­stening of the king, of his manners, of his Court and of other conditions appertayning to the politicke and militarie Gouernment of these people. And afterward we will describe vnto you the kingdomes neere ad­ioyning, [Page 106] and all the regions thereaboutes towardes the South, euen till you come to the Cape of Good Hope, and the riuers and countries of the Ocean that is right a­gainst India: and within land the kingdomes of Presbi­ter Iohn, touching also by the way the spring and original of Nilus, and the causes of his won­derful encrease, which sundry fooles doe account to bee a Miracle.

THE SECOND BOOKE.

Chap. 1. Of the situation of the Royall Cittie of the Kingdome of Congo.

ALthough the chiefe and Royall Cittie of the King­dome of Congo bee after a sort comprehended within the Prouince of Pemba, The Territory of the chiefest Cittie in all Congo contay­neth in com­passe 20. miles about. yet notwithstāding forasmuch as the gouernement there­of, and the territorie there­vnto belonging, which may in compasse amount to the space of twenty miles about, doeth depende wholly of the king of Congo himselfe, wee will place it in a seuerall regiment, and intreate of it by it selfe.

This cittie is called San Saluatore, The chief Cit­ty called San-Saluadore. or Saint Sauiours, and in times past in that country language it was called [Page 108] Banza, which generally signifieth the Court, where the king or the Gouernour doeth ordinarily soiourne.The situation of the Citty. It is seated about 150. miles from the sea, vpon a great and a high Mountaine, being almost all of a rocke, but yet hauing a veyne of iron in it, whereof they haue great vse in their housing. This mountaine hath in the toppe of it a great plaine,The moun­taine where­vpon it stan­deth. very well manured and fur­nished with houses and villages, contayning in circuite about ten miles, where there doeth dwell and liue the number of a hundred thousand persons.

The soile is fruitfull,The soile, the ayre, the wa­ters and the cattell. and the ayre fresh, holesome and pure: there are great store of springes, of indiffe­rent good water to drinke, and at certaine times doo not harme any man: and of all sortes of cattell great aboundance. The toppe of the mountaine is seuered and distinguished from all the rest of the hill which is about it, and therefore the Portingalles doe call it The Otheiro, The Otheiro. that is to say, a Viewe, or a Watch Tower, or a Singular height, from whence you may take a sight of all the Champeigne round about. Onely towardes the East, and towardes the Riuer, it is verye steepe and rockie.

For two causes did the first Princes of this King­dome place this habitation in the foresaide Height of this Mountaine.The reason why they built in this place. First, because it lyeth in the very middest and (as it were) in the Center of all the Realme, from whence he may presently send ayde to any part of his Kingdom that may stand in neede of reliefe: & secondly because it is situated in a Territory that is by Nature mounted aloft, hauing a very good ayre, and of greate safetie: for it cannot be forced. By the chiefe common high way, that goeth vp to the Citie, and [Page 109] looketh towardes the Sea, being distant from thence 150. Miles (as hath bene told you) which way is very large and competent, though it go somewhat about incompasse, you shall ascende (fiue Myles from the bottom to the toppe of the Mountayne.Fiue miles frō the bottome of the hill to the toppe. At the foote thereof on the East syde there runneth a Riuer, where­vnto the women doe descend by the space of a myles walke to washe their clothes.A riuer at the hill foote In diuerse other partes thereof there are sundry valleyes planted & manured: neyther do they suffer any part of the countrey there­aboutes to be left vntilled or vnvsed, because it is the countrey where the Court remaineth.

The Cittie is seated in a corner or angle of the hill towards the Southeast, The particu­cular situation of the Cittie. which Don Alfonso the first chri­stian king did compasse about with walles, and gaue vnto the Portingalles a seuerall place for themselues,A seuerall place for the Portingalles. shut vp likewise within walles. Then did he also inclose his owne pallace and the Kinges howsen with another wall, and in the middest betweene these two enclosures left a great space of ground where the principal Church was built,The principall Church and market place. with a faire market place before it. The doores and gates aswell of the lodginges of the Lords, as of the Portingalles inhabitations, do open on the side of the said Church. For in the vppermost ende of the market place do diuers great Lords of the Court dwel, and behinde the Church doeth the market place runne into a narrow street, where there is also a gate, and be­yond that gate many houses towardes the East. With­out these walles, (which do inclose the kinges houses, and the Cittie of the Portingalles) there are a number of other buildinges, erected by diuers Lordes, e­uery man making his seuerall choice of the place [Page 110] which he thinketh most fit & conuenient for his dwel­ling neere vnto the Court. So that the greatnes of this Citie cannot well be determined or limited. Be­yond these walles also, that thus do compasse this Cit­ty; there is a great champaigne plaine, full of villages, and sundry pallaces, where euery Lorde possesseth (as it were) a whole Towne within him selfe. The circuite of the Portingalles cittie contayneth about a mile: and the kings housen as much. The walles are very thick: the gates are not shutte in the night time, neyther is there any watch or ward kept therein.

And although that plaine doeth lie verie high & aloft,Good store of water. yet is there great aboundance of waters in it, so that there is no want thereof. But the Court and the Portingalles Cittie do al drinke of a certaine fountaine, that springeth continually, towardes the North, and lyeth downe the hill, as farre as a Gunne will shoote: And from hence they doe fetch all their water, and bring it to the Cittie in vesselles of wood, of earth and of leather, vpon the backes of their slaues.

All this plaine is very fruitfull,The plaine very fruitfull. Seuerall sortes of graine. and well manured: It hath meadowes full of grasse, and trees that are al­wayes greene. It beareth sundrie sortes of graine, but the principall and beste of all is called Luco, Luco. which is very like to Mustardseede, but that it is somewhat big­ger. When it is grinded with Hand-Quernes (for so they vse to doe) it yeeldeth a very white meale, where­of they make bread, that is both white, and also of a ve­ry good sauour, and holesome withall: neyther doth it giue place to our wheat in any sort, sauing that they doe not celebrate the Sacramente with it. Of these graines there now is great store ouer all the Kingdom [Page 111] of Congo: but it is not long since that this seede was brought thether from that parte of the riuer Nilus, where it falleth into the second Lake. White Milles called the Mazza of Congo. There is also a white kinde of Millet, called the Mazza of Congo, that is to say, the Corne of Congo: and another graine which they call Maiz, Maiz▪ but they make no account of it, for they giue it to their hogges: neyther doe they greatly e­steeme of Rice. The foresaid Maiz they commonly terme by the name of Mazza-Manputo, that is to say, the Portingalles Corne: for they call a Portingall Man­puto.

There are moreouer diuerse and sundry sortes of trees,Diuers kinds of trees bea­ring fruit. that beare very great store of fruites, insomuch as the greattest parte of the people doe feede vppon the fruites of the Countrey, as Citrons, Limons, and special­ly Orenges, very ful of liquour, which are neither sweet nor sower, & are ordinarily eaten without any annoy­ance or harme at all. And to shewe the fruitfulnesse of this countrey, the said Signor Odoardo reported, that hee had seene from a kernell of the fruit of a Pome-Citrone, which was leaft within the rinde thereof, there spronge vp within the space of fower daies a prettie tall sprigge. Other fruites there are, which they call Banana, Banana and we verily thinke to be the Muses of Aegypt and Soria, sauing that in those countreyes they growe to be as bigge as trees, but here they cut them yearely, to the end they may beare the better, The fruit is ve­ry sweet in smell, and of good nourishment. In these plaines there growe likewise sundry kindes of Palme-trees: Diuers kindes of Palme-trees one that beareth Dates, and another that beareth the Indian Nuttes, called Coccos, because they haue with­in them a certaine shell, that is like to an Ape: and [Page 112] therevpon they vse in Spaine to shewe their children a Coccola when they wold make them afraide. Another Palme tree there groweth also very like to the former, but of a more straunge and singular property: For it yeeldeth Oyle, The oyle of Palme. Wyne, Vineger, Fruite, and Breade. The Oyle is made of the Shale of the fruite, and is of the co­lour and substance of butter, sauing that it is somewhat greenishe. They vse it, as other people do vse Oyle and butter, and it will burne like oile. They annoint their bodies withall, and besides it is very good to eate. They presse it out of the fruite, as oyle is pressed out of the Oliues, and then they boyle it, and so preserue it. The bread is made of the stone of the fruit it self,The bread of Palme which is like to an Almond, but somewhat harder: and within the same is there a certaine kernell or pith, which is good to eate: very holesome and of good nourish­ment.The fruit of the Palme. The whole fruit, together with the vtter shale is greene, and they vse to eate it both raw and rosted. The Wine is drawen from the toppe of the tree,The wine and Vineger of Palme. by making a hole therein, from whence there distilleth a liquor like milke, which at the first is sweet, but after­wardes sowre, and in processe of time becommeth ve­ry Vineger, to serue for sallets. This wine they drinke colde, and it moueth to vrine very much: so that in those countries, there is not a man that is troubled with grauell or stone in the bladder. It will make them drunke, that drinke too much of it: but in deede it is of a very good nutriment.

There are other trees, that beare a certaine fruite called Cola, The fruit Cola as bigge as a Pyne-apple, which hath within it other fruites like Chest-nuttes, wherein are foure seue­rall shales or skinnes, of redde and Carnation colour. [Page]

[figure]

[Page] [Page 115] These they vse to holde in their mouthes, and chawe them, and at last to eate them, for the quenching of their thirst, and better relishing of their water. They comforte and preserue the stomacke, but aboue all other qualities they are singular good against the diseases of the liuer. And it is saide, that the liuer of a Henne or of any other like birde, which is putrified and stinketh, being sprinkled ouer with the matter of this fruit, returneth into his former estate, and becom­meth fresh and sounde againe. This foode is com­monly and generally vsed among them all, and there is very great aboundance of it: and therefore it is good cheape.Other kindes of Palme-trees Other kindes of wilde Palme-trees there are, which yeeld diuers fruites that are eaten: and their leaues reserued to make mattes, wherewith their hou­ses are couered, and baskets and skeppes, and such other like instrumentes,Trees called Ogheghe. that are necessary for their dayly v­ses. Other trees there are likewise, called Ogheghe which beare a fruit which is like a yellow Plumme, and is very good to eate, and hath a very sweete smell withall. Of these trees they cut off the bowes, and plant them so thicke together, that they touch one another, and stand closely all in a ranke, so that when they are growen great, they make a strong fense or wall about their hou­sen, which being afterwardes couered with mattes, it resembleth a handsome Court or closse, wherein they vse to walke, (as it were) in an arbour that maketh a great shaddow, and defendeth them from the heate of the Sunne. In the middest of these enclosures they vse to build certaine housing of woode, couered with straw, & diuided into sundry conuenient rooms, all on the ground without any stories or Sollers aboue them: [Page 114] These they do line with very faire and delicate mattes, and furnish them with other ornaments in very hand­some manner.

Wherein you must note that they doe not builde thus rustically and shephearde-like for want of stuffe to builde withal.Great store of stone to build with all. For in the moun­taines of the Realme of Congo, there are a number of places, that yeelde most exquisite fine stone of diuers kindes: From whence you may digge out whole pil­lers, and principalles, & Bases, and other peeces as big as you list, if ye be disposed to build. Insomuch as it hath beene confidently affirmed, that there are to bee found among them many masses and lumpes of stone, which are of such thicknesse and hugenesse, that you may cut out a whole Church, euen of one whole peece, yea and of the same kinde of stone, whereof the Obelisco is made, that is erected before Portadel Po­polo in Rome. Besides this, there are whole Mountains of Porphyrie, of Iasper, and of white Marble, and of other sundry colours, which here in Rome are called Marbles of Numidia, of Africa, and of Aethiopia: cer­taine pillers, whereof you may see in the Chappell of Pope Gregorie. Other Stone there is, that is speckled with graines or strakes, but among all the rest, that kind is most admirable, which hath in it faire Iacinthes, that are good iewelles. For the strakes being dispearsed like vaynes ouer all the bodie of their Mother-Stone, if you shall diuide them and plucke them out as you would picke the kernels out of a Pomegranate, they wil fall into graines and little peeces of perfect Iacynth: But if you please to make pillers, or Obeliskes, or other such like Memorialles, of the whole Masse, you shall see [Page 117] them shine and sparkle, full of most faire and goodly iewels. There are also other kinds of rare stones, which make a shew of mettell in them, as of Copper, and of sun­dry other colours, that are very fresh, and bright, and smooth, whereof you may make Images, or any other worke of singular beautie. And therefore it is not the scarcitie of matter or stuffe, that is the cause of this their simple building, seeing that their mountains haue such plenty of the foresaid stone, yea and perhaps more store of other kindes, then is to be founde in any other place of the whole worlde,Lime & tim­ber, and cattel to carry and draw. Want of workmen to build. besides lime, and trees for beames, and cattell both for carryage and drawing in the cart, and all other manner of prouision, that is re­quisite for building. True it is in deede, that they want Masons, & Cutters, and Plaisterers, and Carpen­ters, and other such artificers: for when the Churches, and the walles, and the other fabrickes in those coun­tries were built, the workemen were brought thether out of Portingall.

There are also Tamarindes, Stuffe for building ships & housing. and Cassia, and Ceders in such multitudes growing all along the Riuer of Congo, besides other trees of an vnmeasurable length and thicknesse, that an infinite number of shippes and hou­ses may be builded of them. Their gardens do beare all manner of hearbes and fruites,Hearbs and fruites. as Pompions, Melions, Cocombres, Colewortes, and such like, besides other sorts that doo not agree with our Climates of Europe.

Chap. 2. Of the Originall beginning of Christendome in the Kingdome of Congo, and how the Portin­galles obtained this trafficke.

THe K. of Portingal Don Giouanni the secōd,The first tra­fficke of the Portingalles into Congo. being desirous to di­scouer the East Indies, sent forth diuers ships by the coast of A­frica to search out this Nauiga­tion, who hauing founde the Islands of Capo Verde, and the Isle of Saint Thomas, and running all along that coast, did light vpon the Riuer Zaire, wher­of we haue made mention before, and there they had good trafficke, and tryed the people to bee very cour­teous and kinde. Afterwards he sent fourth (for the same purpose) certaine other vesselles, to entertaine this trafficke with Congo, who finding the trade there to be so free and profitable, and the people so frendly, leaft certaine Portingalles behinde them, to learne the language,Mani Sogno the K. vncle entertaineth the Portingals. and to trafficke with them: among whom one was a Masse-priest. These Portingalles conuersing familiarly with the Lorde of Sogno, who was vncle to [Page 119] the King, and a man well stroken in yeares, dwelling at that time in the Port of Praza (which is in the mouth of Zaire) were very well entertained and esteemed by the Prince, and reuerenced as though they had beene earthly Gods, and descended downe from heauen into those Countries. But the Portingalles told them that they were men as themselues were, and professors of Christianitie. And when they perceyued in how great estimation the people held them, the foresaide Priest & others beganne to reason with the Prince touching the Christian religion, and to shew vnto them the errors of the Pagan superstition,Mani-Sogno conuerted & become a Christian. and by little and little to teach them the faith which wee professe, insomuch as that which the Portingalles spake vnto them, greatly pleased the Prince, and so he became conuerted.

With this confidence and good spirit, the prince of Sogno went to the Court, to enforme the King of the true doctrine of the Christian Portingalles, and to en­courage him that he would embrace the Christian Re­ligion which was so manifest, and also so holesome for his soules health. Herevpon the king commanded to call the Priest to Court, to the end he might himself treat with him personally,The King of Congo promi­seth to becom a Christian. and vnderstand the truth of that which the Lord of Sogno had declared vnto him. Whereof when he was fully enformed, he conuerted and promised that he would become a Christian.

And nowe the Portingall shippes departed from Congo, and returned into Portingall: and by them did the King of Congo write to the King of Portingall, Don Giouanni the second, with earnest request, that he would send him some Priestes, with all other orders and ce­remonies to make him a Christian. The Priest also [Page 120] that remayned behind, had written at large touching this busines, and gaue the King ful information of all that had happened,The K. of Por­tingall sendeth Priestes to the K. of Congo to instruct him. agreeable to his good pleasure. And so the King tooke order for sundry religious per­sons, to be sent vnto him accordingly, with all orna­ments for the Church and other seruice, as Crosses and Images: so that hee was throughly furnished with all thinges that were necessary and needefull for such an action.

In the meane while the Prince of Sogno ceased not day and night to discourse with the Portingall priest,Mani-Sogno promoteth the Christian Religion. whom he kept in his owne house, and at his owne ta­ble, aswell that hee might learne the Christian faith himselfe, as also instruct the people therein: so that he began to fauour christianitie with all his power. And forasmuch as the Christian Religion had nowe taken roote and begun to bud in those Countries, and for that both the people, & also the king himselfe did con­tinue in their earnest desire to purge themselues from that abhominable superstition, he did instantly deale with the Priest, that he wold proceed in the sowing & dispearsing of the Christian doctrine, as much as hee could. And in this good affection did they wait for the Portingall shippes, that shoulde bring them all pro­uision for baptisme; and other thinges therevnto ap­pertayning.

At the last the shippes of Portingall arriued with the expected prouisions (which was in the yeare of our saluation 1491) and landed in the port which is in the mouth of the Riuer Zaire. The ships re­turne from Portingall. 1491. Mani-Sogno & his traine entertayneth the Portingals. The Prince of Sogno with all shewe of familiar ioy, accompanied with all his gentlemen ran downe to meete them, and entertained [Page 121] the Portingalles in most courteous manner, and so con­ducted thē to their lodgings. The next day following according to the direction of the Priest that remayned behinde,Mani-Sogno buildeth a Church. the Prince caused a kinde of Church to bee builded, with the bodies and braunches of certayne trees, which he in his owne person, with the helpe of his seruantes, most deuoutly had felled in the woode. And when it was couered, they erected therein three Altars, in the worshippe and reuerence of the most ho­ly Trinitie, Mani Sogno & his sonne baptized. and there was baptised himselfe and his young sonne, himselfe by the name of our Sauiour, E­manuel, and his child by the name of Anthonie, be­cause that Sainte is the Protector of the Cittie of Lisbone.

Now if any man here demande of me, what names the people of these Countries had,What names the people of Congo had be­fore they were christened. before they recey­ued Christianitie: of a truth it will seeme incredible that I must answere them, that is to say, that the men and women had no proper names agreeable to reaso­nable Creatures, but the common names of Plantes, of Stones, of Birdes and of Beastes. But the Princes & Lordes had their denominations from the places and states which they gouerned. As for example the fore­said Prince, which was the first Christian in Congo, was called Mani-Sogno, that is to say, the Prince of Sogno, & when hee was christened, was called Emanuel, but at this day they haue all in generall such Christian names as they haue learned of the Portingalles.

After a Masse was celebrated and songe,A sermon cō ­tayning the summe of Christian Re­ligion. one of the Priestes that came from Portingall went vp, and made a briefe Sermon in the Portingall language, declaring the summe of the new Religion, & faith of the Gospel [Page 122] which they had receiued. This sermon, the Priest that was left behinde, hauing nowe learned the Congo speech, did more at large expounde to the Lords that were in the Church: for the church could not possibly holde the innumerable multitude of the people that were there gathered together,Mani Sogno rehearseth the Sermon to his people. at the conuersion of their Prince: who afterwardes came abroade vnto them, and rehearsed the whole sermon, with great loue and charitie, mouing and exhorting them to imbrace likewise the true beliefe of the Christian doctrine.

When this was done, all the Portingals put themselues on their way towards the Court,The Portingals go to the Court to bap­tise the king. to baptise the King, who with a most feruent longing attended the same. And the Gouernour of Sogno tooke order that many of his Lordes should wait vpon them with Musicke, and singing, and other signes of wonderfull reioysing, be­sides diuers slaues which he gaue them to carry their stuffe, commanding also the people, that they should prepare all manner of victuaill to be ready in the streets for them. So great was the number of people, that ran and met together to beholde them, as the whole Champaigne seemed to be in a manner couered with them, and they all did in great-kindnes entertaine and welcome the Portingall Christians, with singing and sounding of Trompets, and Cimballes, and other in­strumentes of that Countrey. And it is an admirable thing to tell you, that all the streetes and high wayes, that reach from the Sea, to the Citty of Saint Sauiours, being one hundred and fiftie miles, were all cleansed and swept, and aboundantly furnished with all man­ner of victuaile and other necessaries for the Portingals. In deede they do vse in those countries, when the king [Page 123] or the principall Lordes go abroade, to cleanse their waies and make them handsome: and therefore much the rather vpon this speciall occasion, when the Portin­gals, whom they reuerenced as though they had bene some of the old Heroes, did purchase for their King the Iewell of Religion, and saluation of his soule, and ge­nerally for euery one of them the cleere knowledge of God, and of eternall life.

Three dayes iourney from the place whence they departed,The Courtiers of Congo meet the Portingals. they descried the kinges Courtiers, that came to meet them, to present them with fresh victu­ailes, and to doe them honour: and so from place to place they encountred other Lordes, that for the same purpose were sent by the King to receiue the Christi­ans, who were the messengers and bringers of so great a ioy. When they were come within three miles neere to the Cittie, all the Court came to entertaine and wel­come the Portingalles, with all manner of pompe and ioyfulnes, and with musicke and singing; as in those countreyes is vsed vppon their solemnest feast-daies. And so great was the multitude of people, which a­bounded in the streets, that there was neyther tree, nor hillocke, higher then the rest, but it was loaden with those that were runne forth and assembled to viewe these strangers, which brought vnto them this newe law of their saluation. The King himselfe attended them at the gate of his pallace,The king him selfe recceyueth them: in a Throne of estate e­rected vpon a high scaffold, where hee did publikely receiue them, in such manner and sorte as the auncient kinges of that Realme accustomed to doe, when any Embassadours came vnto him, or when his tributes were paied him, or when any other such Royall cere­monies [Page 124] were performed.

And first of all, the Embassador declared the Embas­sage of the King of Portingall, The Portingal Embassadour declareth his Embassage. which was expounded and interpreted by the foresaid Priest, that was the principall authour of the conuersion of those people. After the embassage was thus deliuered,The K. reioy­ceth at the Embassage. the King ray­sed himselfe out of his seate, and standinge vpright vppon his feete, did both with his countenaunce and speech shew most euident signes of the great ioy, that he had conceyued for the comming of the Christians, and so sate downe againe.The people reioyce at it. And incontinently all the people with shouting, and sounding their trumpets, & singing, and other manifest arguments of reioycing, did approue the kinges wordes, and shewed their ex­ceeding good liking of this Embassage. And further in token of obedience, they did three times prostrate themselues vpon the grounde, and cast vp their feete, according to the vse of those kingdomes, thereby al­lowing and commending the action of their king, and most affectionately accepting of the Gospell, which was brought vnto them from the Lorde God by the handes of those religious persons.

Then the king tooke view of all the presentes that were sent him by the King of Portingall, The K. view­eth the Pre­sents sent vnto him by the K. of Portingall. and the Ve­stimentes of the Priestes, and the Ornamentes of the Altar, and the Crosses, and the Tables, wherein were de­painted the Images of Saintes, and the Streamers, and the Banners, and all the rest, and with incredible atten­tion, caused the meaning of euery one of them to bee declared vnto him, one by one. And so withdrewe himselfe, and lodged the Embassadour in a pallace made ready of purpose for him, and all the rest were [Page 125] placed in other houses of seuerall Lordes, where they were furnished with all plentie and ease.

The day following the King caused all the Por­tingalles to bee assembled together in priuate:Consultation among the Portingals for the Christe­ning of the K. & for the buil­ding of a Church. where they deuised of the course that was to be taken for the christening of the king, and for effecting the full con­uersion of the people to the christian faith. And af­ter sundry discourses, it was resolued and concluded, that first of all a Church shoulde be builded, to the end that the christening, and other ceremonies therevnto belonging, might be celebrated therein with the more solemnity: and in the meane while the king and the Court should be taught and instructed in the Christi­an Religion. The king presently commaunded, that with all speed prouision should be made of all manner of stuffe necessary for this building, as Timber, Stone, Lime and Bricke, according to the direction and ap­poiutment of the Worke-maisters and Masons, which for that purpose were brought out of Portingall. An insurrecti­on raised by the Deuill, to hinder the progresse of Christian Re­ligion.

But the Deuill who neuer ceaseth to crosse all good and holy proceedinges, raysed new dissentions, and conspiracies, and lettes against this promoting of the Christian Faith, which in deede began to ouerthrowe, and destroy the power that hee had long helde in that Realme, and in steed thereof to plant the most health­full tree of the Crosse, and the worship of the Gospell. And this hee did by procuring a rebellion among cer­taine people of the Anzichi, and of Anzicana, which dwell vpon both the bankes of the Riuer Zaire, from the foresaid falles vpwardes, to the great Lake, and are subiect and belonging to the King of Congo. Now this monstrous Riuer being! restrained and kept backe by [Page 126] these falles, doeth swell there mightily, and spreadeth it selfe abroade in a very large and deepe channell. In the breadth whereof there are many Islandes, some small and some great, so that in some of them, there may be maintayned about thirtie thousande persons. In these Islandes and in other places adioyninge to the riuers thereaboutes, did the people make an insurrecti­on, and renounced their obedience to the king, and slew the Gouernours that hee had sent thether to rule.

And all this was done by the Deuill, of purpose to interrupt the propagation of Christianity, which was now begunne, and to hinder it by the meanes of this rebellion. But the King, by the inspiration of God, prouided a good remedy for this mischiefe, and sent thether his eldest sonne,Mani-Sundi goeth against the rebelles. called Mani-Sundi, within whose Prouince that countrey lyeth. And yet after­wardes the trouble and tumult fell out to be so great & daungerous, that the king must needes go himselfe in person to pacifie these broyles: howbeit hee resolued to be baptised before his going, and so was enforced to forbeare the building of the Church of Stone, and with all speed in steed thereof to erect one of timber, which Church hee in his owne person with the aduice of the Portingalles, The K. build­eth in haste a Church of timber. did accomplish in such manner and sort as it ought to be, and therein did receiue the Sacrament of holy Baptisme, and was named Don Giouanni, and his wife Donna Eleonora, The K. & Q. of Congo Christened. after the names of the king and Queene of Portingall, and the Church it selfe intituled and dedicated to S. Sauiour. The Church of S. Saviours.

But here it is to be noted, that all these stirs and re­bellion of the people aforesaide, arose by the cunning sleight & instigation of the Deuill, & not of the poore [Page 127] soules themselues, that dwell in those Islandes of the Great Lake: The Latine historie of the Indies doth re­port amisse of this rebellion▪ (as it is written in the first booke of the hi­stories of the Indies lately set forth in latine). For the Lake is distant from the confines of the Cittie of Congo, about two hundred miles, neyther had the inhabitants thereaboutes any knowledge of Congo, but onely by hearesay in those dayes, and very little they haue of it as yet, at this day. And besides that, the booke is faultie in the name of that people that rebelled: for it calleth them Mundiqueti, whereas in deede the Por­tingalles do rightly call them Anziqueti.

The same day, wherein the king was baptised, di­uers other Lords following his example were baptised likewise,Diuers Lordes baptised. hauing first learned certaine principles of the Christian Fayth. The K. goeth in person against the re­bels, and dis­comfiteth thē ▪ And when all this was done, the kinge went in person to dispearse the turbulent attemptes of his aduersaries, against whom he found the Prince his sonne, and the Lorde of Batta already fighting with a formall Armie. But at the arriual of the king, the ene­mies yeelded, and submitted themselues to the obedi­ence which before they performed: and so he returned in triumph to the Cittie of Congo, and the Prince his son with him, who presently was desirous to become a Christian, and was christened by the name of the first Prince of Portingall, Mani-Sundi christened and many other with him. called Alfonso: and with him also were christened many gentlemen and Caualieros, and other of his seruantes, that came with him out of his Prouince.

But see the Deuill once againe, the vtter enemy of Christian Religion, howe hee prosecuted his former in­tent to hinder Christianitie among these people. For when hee perceyued that hee preuayled nothing by [Page 128] these wars, he incensed the mind of the Kings second Son, that hee woulde not agree to receiue the new Keligion which his Father, Mani-Pango resisteth the Gospell. his Mother, his Brother so many o­ther Lords had imbraced, sowing his Cockle & Darnel not onely in him, but also in many other Lordes that fauoured him, who being addicted rather to the sen­sualitie of the flesh, then the puritie of the minde, resi­sted the Gospel, which beganne now to be preached, especially in that Commaundement, wherein it is for­bidden that a man should haue any mo wiues but one. A matter that among them was more harde and diffi­cult to be receyued, then any other Commandement whatsoeuer, because they were vsed to take as many wiues as they would. And thus the two brethren being diuided betweene themselues, eyther of them did stiffly maintaine his seuerall opinion. The eldest brother Don Alfonso, did with great feruencie, defende Christianitie, & burned all the Idoles that were with­in his Prouince. The second brother (called Mani-Pango, because he was Gouernour of the Countrey of Pango) did resist it mightely, and had gotten the great­est part of the principall Lordes of Pango to bee on his side. For there were diuers of the newe christned Lordes, whose Ladies seeing themselues seperated, and forlorne of their Husbande-Lordes by force of the Chri­stian Lawe, did take it as a great iniury and scorne done vnto them, and blasphemed and cursed this new Reli­gion beyond all measure. These Lords vnited them­selues together with others,Mani-Pango and his com­plices accuse Mani-Sundi to his father. and began to plot treache­ry against Don Alfonso, hoping that if they could ridde him out of the world, the Christian Faith would vtter­ly cease of it selfe. And therefore Mani-Pango and [Page 129] his complices gaue intelligence to his Father, that the Prince Don Alfonso fauoured the Christian faction, one­ly to the end that vnder the colour of his countenance and fauour they might rayse an insurrection and rebel­lion against him, and so driue him out of his king­dome.

The king gaue credite to their informations,The K. depri­ueth Mani-Sundi of his gouernment, and depriued his sonne of the Gouernement wherein hee was placed: But the prouidence of God which reser­ued him for a greater matter, did relieue him by the good mediation and counsell of his frendes, who en­treated the King his Father, that he would not be mo­ued to anger, before he had examined the answeres & reasons of the Prince his sonne. Wherein the Kinge was especially perswaded by Mani-Sogno, who (as we tolde you) was before christened,Mani-Sogno maketh inter­cession for his brother. and called Don Ema­nuel, and by good happe was in Court at that present. This man (being the auncientest Courtier and Lorde of that time, singularly well beloued of the king and all his people) did with sound reasons and dexterity of wit, procure the king to reuoke the sentence that was giuen against the Prince Don Alfonso, so that the Kinge being afterwardes throughly informed both of the ho­nest mind and actions of his sonne, perceiued that the accusations plotted against him, were false and malici­ous,Mani-Sundi restored. and therevpon restored him againe to his former gouernement, with a speciall charge, that hee shoulde not proceed with such rigour against the Gentiles, for the propagation & exaltation of the christian Religion. But he being full of feruent charity, and godly spirit, ceased not (for all that) to aduance the faith of the Go­spell, and to put the commandements of God in execu­tion.

[Page 130] Wherevpon his aduersaries who neuer rested from their former attempt, were continually at the Kinges elbowe, and sought by all cunning shifts and secret de­uises, to destroy that which the good prince had build­ed, especially when they saw that the Prince of Sogno was departed from Court, and returned into his Go­uernement. So that no body being now leaft to pro­tect & defend the Christian Religion, The K. waue­reth in Religi­on, & calleth Mani-Sundi to account, of purpose to de­priue him. the King began to doubt of the faith, which with so great zeale he had before embraced: and therefore sent to his sonne, that he should come againe to the Court, to make account of those Reuenues that hee had gathered within the Countrey of his Gouernement, with a full intent and meaning indeed to depriue him, when his accountes shoulde be finished. But hee being illumined by his good Angell, and discouering the treacheries of the e­nemies of God and himselfe, delayed and delayed the matter so long, that in the meane while, his Father be­ing an old man,The K. dyeth. did by meanes of a naturall infirmity departe out of this life. And his mother who alwaies perseuered constant in the Catholicke Faith, The Queene Mother sen­deth in all hast for her sonne Mani-Sundi. louinge her eldest sonne most entirely, concealed the Kinges death for the space of three daies, being therein aided and assisted by some of her trustie frendes, and gaue it out, that the King had taken such order as no man might come vnto him to trouble him. In the meane season she did secreatly signifie to her Sonne the death of his father, which she would keepe close till his com­ming, and charged him without any delay, and in all haste to speede him to the Court. This she did by certaine Runners, that from place to place in conueni­ent [Page]

[figure]

[Page] [Page 133] distaunces and iourneyes, are alwayes readie like Postes to conueigh the precepts and commandements of the King ouer all the Realme. Wherevpon he pre­sently caused himselfe to be carryed Post both day and night, by certaine slaues according to the vse of that Countrey, and in one day and two nightes, with most exquisite diligence accomplished the iourney of two hundred miles, and so arriued at the Cittie, before he was expected.

Chap. 3. Don Iohn, the first Christian King being dead, Don Alfonso his sonne succeeded. Of his warres against his Bro­ther. Of certaine miracles that were wrought, and of the Conuersion of those people.

NOw together with the death of the king,The funerall of K. Iohn, ce­lebrated by K. Alfonso. there was also published the succession to the Crowne of Don Alfonso, being then present, who in his owne person did ac­companie the corps of his deade Father to the buriall, withall the Lords of the Court, and all the Christian Portingalles, [Page 134] which was solemnised after the manner of Christen­dome, with seruice and prayers for the dead, and all this with such funerall pompe, as was neuer seene be­fore among those people. But they which hereto­fore were aduersaries to this newe King, doubting of their owne safetie if they should remaine in the Court, vnited themselues with Mani-Pango, who was nowe departed into the Prouince of his owne Gouernment,Mani-Pango rebelleth against his brother. and while his father liued, was wholly employed in fighting against the Mozombi, and certaine other peo­ple that had rebelled against him. When he heard of the death of his Father, and vnderstoode that his brother was already placed in the Seate Royall, he tooke truce with his enemies, and gathering together a great armie beganne to go in armes against his Brother, and lead with him almost all the whole Realme, which in deed fauoured him, to the number of two hundred thousande men. King Alfonso awaited his comming at the Royall Cittie, with a very small number, sauing that he was directed, aduised and assisted by the good auncient Lord Mani-Sogno, who vniting himselfe vn­to him in the strength and vertue of the holy Christian Faith, The Kinges power both slender and timorous. and making a list of all those armed frends, that he had to defend him against so great an enemy, found by computation that they did not amount to the num­ber of ten thousand, among which there were but a­bout one hundred Christians, naturall of that Coun­trey, besides some few Portingalles, which by chance arriued there at that time.

All these people were indeed too few for such an encounter, and therefore not very resolute to abide a­ny attempt, but became very doubtfull and timorous, [Page 135] by reason of the great power, that Mani-Pango brought with him. But the king trusting confidently in his strong faith, and in the Celestiall aide and assistance: comforted and strengthened his souldiers by all the meanes he could, and so did the good olde Lorde his vncle, who ceased not, both night and day, with words and deeds to encourage that smal number, which they had, to expect and endure the assaults of their aduersa­ries, with all manhoode and courage, assuring them, that God would bee their helpe and succour. Thus while they attended the procedinges of their enemies, Mani-Pango and his forces set forwardes to the be­sieging of the Cittie, with so great a noise of warlicke instrumentes, and cries, and shoutinges, and terrible threatninges, that the poore fewe, which were in the Cittie, aswel Christians as others, fainted in their harts, and failed in their courage, and came and presented themselues before the king, saying, that hee had not power enough to resist so power-full an enemie, and therefore they thought it better for him to growe to some concorde and composition, and to abandon the new Religion, which hee had lately begun to professe, to the ende hee might not fall into the handes of his cruell aduersaries.The king to his souldiers. But the king being resolute, and full of religious constancie, reproued their cowardise, and called them dastardes, and base people, and willed them, if they had any mind or desire to forsake him, & go to the enemie, that they should so doe: As for him­selfe and those few that would follow him, hee did not doubt but assuredly trust, though not with the possibi­litie or strength of man, yet with the fauour of God, to vanquish and ouercome that innumerable multitude. [Page 136] And therefore he would not request them eyther to ioyne with him, or to put their liues in hazarde against his aduersaries for his sake, but onely they might rest themselues and expect the issue that shoulde followe thereon.

But they for all this speech became neuer a whit the more couragious,The Kinges Souldiers de­part from him. but rather waxed more timorous, & were vtterly determined to forsake the king, and to saue themselues. Now they were scarse out of the Cittie, and on their way homewardes, when by great good fortune, they met with the good old Lord Mani-Sogno, who with some few of his followers had beene abroade to surueigh the enemies Campe,Mani-Sogno meeteth with them. and to make prouision for such thinges as were necessary in such an action: To him they declared all that they had before declared to the King, That they thought it to bee a point of expresse madnesse, to put their liues and goods in daunger with so fewe people against an infinite multitude, and that without all doubt it were a safer way to compounde with the enemie, and so saue themselues. The good Lorde with great pietie and Christian valour aunswered them, that they should not so quickly fall into dispaire; but (as the king had tould them before) they should looke vpon Iesus Christ the Sauiour of the worlde, whose faith and religion they had so lately and with so great zeale gay­ned and purchased: who also most assuredly and vn­doubtedly would succour and defend those that were his. And so entreated them, that they woulde not like rash headed people chaunge their mindes from that holy doctrine, which they had with such feruency of late receyued, adding moreouer, that they had not to fight with a straunge nation, nor with a people that [Page 137] came from farre Countries, but with their owne kins­men and countreymen, so that they might alwaies haue opportunity (if need so require) to yeelde them­selues, and in all frendship and kindnesse to bee embra­ced. Behold I pray you (saith Mani-Sogno) mine age now arriued to a hundred yeares, and yet I beare armes for the zeale and defence of the Religion that I haue entred, and for the homage and honour that I owe to my king. And you that are in the flower of your yeares, do you shew your selues to be so base and feareful, and vnfaithfull to your owne narurall king? If algates you be not minded to fight your selues, yet incourage your vassals and subiects, and doo not dismay them. Let vs expect the first encounter of the enemie, and there­vpon we shall not want fit occasion to take some other course and prouide for our safetie.

With these comfortable wordes,The Fugitiues returne and aske the King forgiuenes. the Lords re­couered their spirites that were quailed, and returned backe with him to seeke the king, who was in the Church at his prayers, beseeching God to sende him helpe and succour. They waited for him vntill he came forth, and then kneeled downe vpon their knees before him, requesting pardon for their fault and want of dutie, which they had shewed vnto him being their Prince, in that they would haue forsaken him when he was in this extreame daunger, and promising that they would put on a new and constant courage for the de­fence of him, and of the law and religion which they had receyued, and that they would fight for the same euen vntill death.The K. giueth thankes to God. But the king who perceyued well that this comfort and helpe came from God himselfe, first gaue him hartie thanks secretly from the bottome [Page 139] of his hart, and vowed that he would sacrifice himselfe for the maintenance of his faith and Gospell. And then with a cheerefull countenance he saide. I doe beleeue (Lord) that thy greatnes is infinite, and that thou canst doo all thinges, and canst make of little much, and of much little, whensoeuer it pleaseth thee. Neyther do I any thing doubt, but that thou wilt yeeld aide to this my weakenes, and assist the same with thine inuincible force, so that through thy gracious fauour, with these few and weake persons I shall become the conquerour not onely of this armie, but also of a farre greater, if it should come against me. And I promise thee (O my God) besides that which I haue already spoken, that I will all the dayes of my life promote and exalt thy true faith, thy holy name, and thy most holesome do­ctrine. The King e­recteth a Crosse of a great length. In testimony and memory of which his con­fession, he did presently cause a Crosse to bee planted, & erected in the middest of the market place right against the Church, which his father had builded: This Crosse was of a wonderful length, for it was fourescore span long, and the Crosse-barre in proportion aunswerable therevnto. Nowe the eternall God, who knew the faith from whence this vow of the good king did pro­ceed, vouchsafed to comfort him with a celestiall visi­on, which was a very cleere and admirable light. At the shining whereof,A vision ap­peared to him hee cast himselfe vpon his knees, and wept, and lifted vp his handes and eyes to hea­uen, but spake not a word, for that hee was ouercome with teares, and sighes, and wholly rauished in spirite. But that which he himselfe saw, was seene of no body els, neyther woulde hee euer publish the same to any man. All those that were in his company did euen [Page 138] as he did, and for a while lost the sight of their eyes: and by reason of that miraculous light remayned in a traunce.The Armes of the King of Congo. At the last euery man lifted vp his eyes, and perceyued that there were imprinted on him fiue Swordes, very bright and cleere, which for the space almost of an houre continued vnmoueable (as it were) in a circle, but all they could neyther vnderstand nor expounde what was the meaning thereof. The fiue Swordes the King tooke for his armes, as is to be seene in his Signet Royall, which hath beene vsed euer sithence that time, yea euen by the Kinge that nowe liueth and raigneth. The Crosse also, that was thus planted by vowe, is to be seene in the same place, wherein it was erected, at the front of the Church, which Church was called Saint Crosses, of the Crosse there planted, and of the miracle that there appeared. This Crosse the last King, that dead is, Don Aluaro father to the King that now is, renewed and made another of the same bignes that the first was of, in remembraunce of such a miracle. For the old Crosse was in time decai­ed and consumed, and quite fallen downe.

The aforesaid vision did greatly confirme the minds of the Cittizens, which before were quailed, and did wonderfully appall and fully terrifie the enemies, when they vnderstood the news thereof.The proude message of Mani-Pango to the King. Notwithstanding Mani-Pango sent vnto the King, & signified vnto him and to all the rest that were with him, that if they did not incontinently yeelde themselues, and deliuer the Cittie vnto him, and create and sweare him for their King, and withall abandon and relinquish their newe Christian Religion, he would put them all to the edge of the sworde: but if they would so do, hee woulde [Page 140] freely pardon them. Herevnto the Lordes that stood on the Kinges parte answered,The Kinges answere. that they were most rea­dy to die in defence of their Prince, and of the Christian Faith. But in particular the King sent him this message, that he nothing feared his terrible threates, but rather as his kind brother was very sory, euen from his hart, to see that he walked in darkenes, and strayed out of the way of light: that the kingdome did by law belong vn­to him, and was not fraudulently vsurped by him: And that the Religion, which he had receyued, was assured­ly deliuered him from God, who no doubt woulde protect and maintaine him therein: And withall be­sought him, that he would estraunge himselfe from his false beliefe and worshipping of the Deuill, wherein he had beene nourished and brought vp, and that he wold be baptized, for so hee shoulde become the childe of God, and mertie the Glorie Celestiall. The King re­wardeth his followers. Then the King sent to fetch his iewelles and other rich ornamentes of housholde, which he had at home, and the better to encourage these Lordes, that tooke his part, hee most graciously distributed them amongst them all: where­with they remayned very greatly satisfied, and bounde themselues to prosecute his enterprise and to followe his ensigne with a most ardent courage.

This being done, the very same night, the one halfe almost of the base people that were in armes,Certain timo­rous fugitiues runne to the Campe of Mani-Pango. being sur­prised with a very great feare did secretly flie into the Campe of Pango, and hauing thus reuolted, gaue Mani-Pango to vnderstand, that the King and all the rest of his retinue were vtterly dismaied and discouraged, that euery man was deuising with himselfe how he might escape, & that they had none other meane to saue [Page 141] themselues but onely by taking the lane that leadeth downe to the Riuer, which (as wee haue tolde you) was distant from the Cittie about the space of a mile. At the end of which lane,A stratagem of Mani-Pāgo. betweene the Riuer and the hill, there was a little Moore about two foot deepe on the right hande, and on the left hand were the moun­taines, and the garrisons of Pango, that had besieged & beset the hill, so that there was none other issue for them to escape, but onely by passing ouer the Moore, which was in length as farre as the shotte of an Arcu­buse could reach, and as much in bredth, and then to come to the Riuer. Mani-Pango beleeuing all this, that they had related vnto him, sent presently to stop that passage, with planting sharpe stakes in the bottome of the Moore, which were couered with water, to the ende that if his enemies shoulde flie in the darke of the night because they would not be seene, they shoulde be all staked and taken therein. All that night he with all his armie remayned in great ioy, and awaited the fresh morning, that he might giue the assault vpon the Cittie, bethinking himselfe in the meane while, what course might be most easie and conuenient for him to attempt the same.

But Don Alfonso on the other side, hauing con­fessed himselfe,Mani-Pango assaulteth the Cittie. and consulted with all the most faithful and loyall frendes that hee had, expected his enemie, who assuring himselfe of the victorie, and hauing now granted all the Cittizens goodes, and all the states and Gouernementes of the kingdome, to his great Lords a­bout him, very earely in the morning with a furious violence gaue assault to the Cittie, on that side which is towardes the North, where the great and wide plaine [Page 142] restrayning it selfe into a narrow straite, entreth (as it were) into a rounde circle, naturally compassed about with certaine hilles, and then maketh a large way, as broade as a man maye shoote with a Gunne, vn­till you come to the site or place where the Cittie standeth, which is a little plaine of two miles compasse, wherein (as it hath beene tolde you) the Cittie and the Church, and the Lordes houses and the kings court are situate. In this place did Don Alfonso, with those few that he had with him, settle himselfe against the Pa­gans, Mani-Pango discomfited without any fight. and against his Enemie Brother, who before hee coulde confront the Kinge, was vtterly discomfi­ted, dispearsed and put to flight. Wherevppon the king perceyuing that he was ouerthrowne and driuen to runne away, was wonderfully amazed, not know­ing himselfe how this matter came to passe, seeing that he had not ioyned battel, nor fought with his enemies, and therefore must needes thinke, that it so fell out by some hidden and secreate meanes to him vnknowne. Notwithstanding the day following Mani-Pango re­turned to the assault in the same place,Mani-Pango the seconde time discomfi­ted in like manner. but hee was in the same manner once again discomfited and constrai­ned to flie: whereby hee knew assuredly that this his losse and ouerthrow was not occasioned by the valour of his enemies, but onely by some miracle. So that the people of the Cittie mocking and scorning those Ido­laters, and taking stomacke vnto them, for these two victories thus happened, beganne nowe to make no re­coning of them, and woulde with all violence haue runne vpon them. To whome their aduersaries made this aunswere, Tush you are not the men that haue thus vanquished vs, but it was a certaine faire Lady all in [Page 143] white, which with her admirable brightnesse had blinde­ded vs, and a Knight riding vppon a white palfrey, that had a redde Crosse vppon his breast: and hee it was that fought against vs, and turned vs to flight. Which when the King vnderstoode, he sent to tell his brother, that of those two, the one was a Virgin, the Mother of Christ, whose faith he had embraced: and the other was S. Iames, who both were sent from God to succour and relieue him, and that if he also would become a Chri­stian, they would likewise shew great grace and fauour vnto him.Mani-Pango assaulteth the Cittieon both sides at once. But Mani-Pango would not accept of this message, but all the night following did put himselfe in a readinesse to besiege the Cittie vpon both sides at once, the one with one part of his Armie at the straite aboue mentioned, and the other with another parte of his people, himselfe in his owne person compassing about by the lane that ascendeth from the riuer, and so in a place vtterly vnprouided of eyther watch or ward, he thought to attempt the victorie. Those that were aboue at the strait did first ioyne battell, and were quite discomfited and ouerthrowne: and Pango himselfe, hoping to haue thrust forward on the other side, while his enemies were wholly occupyed in defending them­selues at the straite, found himselfe greatly deceyued: for his people were already put to flight by those of the Cittie▪ who perceyuing the great noyse, that Pango and his troupes made in ascending the hill on the o­ther side, ranne with all speed to meete with that dan­ger, and driuing him and all his people backe againe, put them in disarray, and then so vexed and molested them with such a furie of dartes and other weapons, which they threwe among them, that Pango being o­uercome [Page 144] with feare and daunger ranne away,The strata­gem of Mani-Pango turneth to his owne destruction. and fell into the snares and nettes which he himselfe had layde for the Christians. For lighting among the foresaide stakes, he was with one of them thrust into the bodie, and so being surprised with an euill death, he finished his life, as it were in a rage. For you must vnderstand that the sharpe ends of the said stakes were envenomed with a certaine poyson,The death of Mani-Pango. which taking holde of the blood, and entring somewhat into the flesh, woulde kill without all cure or remedy.

By this victory and death of his brother did the king remaine in securitie and libertie, wiihout all contradi­ction, and then thinking with himselfe, that his peo­ple and subiectes were in a great doubt and quandarie, and durst not for feare present themselues before him, by reason of the errour that they had committed a­gainst him, like a good Prince hee sent to signifie vnto them, that he would pardon their former faultes, and receiue them into his grace and fauour. Wherevpon they came and yeelded themselues vnto him with all obedience,The Rebelles yeeld to the kings mercie. all sauing the Captaine Generall, whose name was Mani-Bunda. For hee feared greatly to appeare before the king, for very shame of his disloyaltie and villanie: but yet at the last hee obtained his pardon, with a certaine penance enioyned him, that he should go and serue in the building of the Church: wherevp­on he became afterwardes so humble and deuout a Christian: that when the King woulde haue eased him of that trauell, he would not by any meanes giue ouer his labour, vntill such time as all the Church was whol­ly built and finished.

The Kingdome being thus pacified, and all things [Page 145] well established, the king Don Alfonso tooke order, that they should presently go in hande with the fabricke of the principall Church, The building of the Church called Saint Crosses. called S. Crosses, which was so na­med of the Crosse that was there planted (as wee tolde you before) and also because vpon the feast day of the Holy Crosse the first stone was layed in the foundation thereof. Moreouer hee commaunded that the men should bring stones, and the weomen shoulde fetch sand from the Riuer, for the furthering of this worke. The king woulde needes bee the first Porter himselfe, and vppon his owne shoulders brought the first basket of stones, which he cast into the foundation, and the Queene her basket of sande likewise, thereby giuing an example to the Lordes and the Ladies of the Court to do the like, and to encourage and harten the people in so holy an action. And so this fabricke being fur­thered by so good worke-maisters and workemen, in a very short time was fully finished, and therein were celebrated Masses, and other diuine seruice, with great solemnitie, besides a number of Lords and others that were there baptised and christened: so that the multi­tude of such as came to bee partakers of the Holy Bap­tisme abounded so greatly, that there were not Priestes enough to execute that office.

After this the king dispatched away the Portingall Embassadour, K. Alfonso dis­patcheth the Portingal Em­bassadour, & mother of his owne into Portingall▪ who till this time had remained at the Court, by reason of these troubles: and with him hee sent also another Embassadour of his owne, called Don Roderico, and diuerse others that were of kinne both to himselfe and to his Embassadour, to the ende that they should learne both the doctrine of the Christians in Por­tingall, and also their language, and further declare vn­to [Page 146] the King all these accidents that had happened.

Moreouer hee caused the Lordes of all his pro­uinces to bee assembled together in a place appoin­ted for that purpose,The K. com­mandeth all Idolles to be brought in, & all other things that are contrary to Christian Re­ligion. and there publikely signified vn­to them, that whosoeuer had any Idoles, or any thing els that was contrary to the Christian Religion, he should bring them forth and deliuer them ouer to the Lieuete­nantes of the Countrey: Otherwise whosoeuer did not so, should be burned themselues without remissi­on or pardon. Which commandement was inconti­nently put in execution. And a wonderfull thing it is to bee noted, that within lesse then one moneth, all the Idolles, and Witcheries and Characters, which they worshipped and accounted for Gods, were sent and brought vnto the Court. And certainely the number of these toyes was infinite: for euery man adored and reuerenced the thing that best liked him, without any order, or measure, or reason at all, so that there was among them a huge multitude of Deuilles, in sundrie straunge and terrible shapes. Many there were, that carryed a deuotion to Dragons with winges, which they nourished and fed in their owne priuate houses, giuing vnto them for their foode the best and most costly viandes that they had. Others kept Serpents of horrible figures: Some worshipped the greatest Goates, they could get, some Tygres, and other most monstrous Creatures, yea the more vncouth & defor­med the beastes were, the more they were honoured. Some held in veneration certaine vncleane foules and night-birdes, as Backes, Owles and Schritche-Owles, and such like. To be briefe, they did choose for their Gods diuers Snakes, and Adders, and Beastes, and Birdes, and [Page 147] Hearbes, and Trees, and sundry Characters of woode and of stone, & the figures of all these things aboue rehear­sed, aswell painted in colours, as grauen in woode and in stone, and in such other stuffe. Neyther did they onely content themselues with worshipping the saide creatures when they were quick and aliue, but also the very skins of them when they were dead, being stuffed with straw.

The acte of this their adoration was performed in diuers sortes,Their deuout worshipping of Idols. all wholly addressed and directed to ex­presse their humilitie, as by kneeling on their knees, by casting themselues groueling vpon the earth, by defi­ling their faces with dust, by making their prayers vn­to their Idoles in wordes and in actions, and by offering vnto them the best parte of the substaunce which they had in their possession.Witches They had moreouer their Wit­ches, which made the foolish people to belieue, that their Idoles could speake: and so deceyued them: and if any man being in sicknes or infirmitie woulde recom­mend himselfe vnto them, and afterwardes that man recouered his health, the Witches woulde perswade him that the Idole had beene angry with him, but now was appeased and had healed him. And this is in part that which was vsed among the Moci-Conghi concer­ning their Religion, before they had receiued the Wa­ter of Holy Baptisme, and the knowledge of the liuing God.

Now the King hauing gathered together all these abhominable Images, The K. bur­ned all the Idols. and put them into diuers houses within the Cittie, and commanded, that to the same place, where a little before hee had fought and van­quished his brothers Armie, euery man should bring a [Page 148] burthen of woode, which grew to be a great heape, & when they had cast into it all the said Idoles, & pictures, and whatsoeuer els the people afore that time held for a God, he caused fire to be set vnto them, and so vtter­ly consumed them. When he had thus done, he as­sembled all his people together, and in steed of their Idoles which before they had in reuerence, hee gaue them Crucifixes and Images of Saintes, which the Portin­galles had brought with them, and enioyned euery Lord, that euery one in the Cittie of his owne Gouern­ment and Regiment shoulde builde a Church, The king commandeth euery Lorde to build a Church in the Cittie of his owne gouern­ment. and set vp Crosses, as he had already shewed vnto them by his owne example. And then he tolde them and the rest of his people, that hee had dispatched an Embassadour into Portingall to fetch Priestes, that should teach them Religion, and administer the most holy and holesome Sacraments to euery one of them, and bring with them diuers Images of Christ, of the Virgin Mother, and of o­ther Saintes to distribute among them. In the meane while hee willed them to bee of good comfort, and to remaine constant in the faith. But they had so liuely imprinted the same in their hartes, that they neuer more remembred their former beliefe in false and ly­ing Idoles.

He ordayned moreouer, that there shoulde be three Churches builded.The K. build­eth 3. Churches One to Saint Sauiour. One in reuerence of our Sauiour, to giue him thanks for the victorie which he had gran­ted vnto him, wherein the Kinges of Congo doe lye bu­ried, and whereof the Cittie Royall tooke the name, (for as it was tolde you before, it is called S. Sauiours.) The second Church was dedicated to the Blessed Virgin, The second to our Ladie of Helpe. the Mother of God, called Our Ladie of Helpe, in memory [Page 149] of the succour which he had against his enemies: And the thirde was consecrated to S. Iames: The third to S. Iames▪ in honour and remembraunce of the miracle, which that Saint had wrought by sighting in the fauour of the Christians, & shewing himselfe on horsebacke in the heat of the bat­tell.

Not long after this,The ships re­turne from Portingall with Friers, & Priestes. the shippes arriued from Por­tingall, with many men that were skifull in the holy scriptures, and diuers religious Friers of the orders of S. Frauncis, and of Saint Dominike, and of Saint Austine, with sundry other Priestes, who with great charitie and feruencie of spirite, sowed and dispearsed the Ca­tholike Faith ouer all the Countrey: which was pre­sently embraced by all the people of the kingdome, who held the said Priests in so high reuerence, that they worshipped them like Saintes, by kneeling vnto them, and kissing their hands, and receiuing their blessing, as often as they met them in the streetes. These Priestes being arriued into their seueral Prouinces, did instruct the people in the faith of Christ, and taking vnto them certaine of the naturalles of the Countrey, they taught them the true heauenly doctrine, whereby they might the better declare the same to their owne Countrey­men in their owne proper language. So that in pro­cesse of time the Catholike Faith was rooted ouer all those Countreyes in such sorte, as it perseuereth and continueth there euen till this day, although it hath endured some small hinderance, as in conuenient place we shall shew vnto you.

Chap. 4. The death of the King Don Alfonso, and the succession of Don Piedro. How the Islande of Saint Thomas was first in­habited, and of the Bishop that was sent thether. Other great accidents that happened by occasion of Religion. The death of two Kings by the conspiracie of the Portingalles & the Lordes of Congo. How the Kinges linage was quite extinguished. The banishment of the Portingalles.

WHile these matters were thus in working for the seruice of God, & that Christianitie was nowe begun and encreased with so happy suc­cesse,King Alfonso dyeth. it pleased God to call away to himselfe the King Don Alfonso, who at the time of his death yeel­ded great signes, which beautified and exalted his for­mer life, For he dyed in great faith, declaring that his hower was now come, and discoursed of the Chri­stian Religion with so great confidence and charitie, as it euidently appeered that the Crosse and Passion, & the true beliefe in our Sauiour Iesus Christ was imprinted in the roote of his heart.Don Piedro succeedeth him. To Don Piedro, his sonne & successour he did especially & principally recommend [Page 151] the Christian doctrine, which in deed following the ex­ample of his father, he did maintain and vphold accor­dingly.

In his time, there began to sayle into these quarters a great number of vessels,The Isle of S. Thomas be­ginneth to be inhabited. and the Islande of S. Thomas was inhabited with Portingalles, by the Kinges com­mandment. For before those dayes it was all waste and desert within lande, and inhabited onely vpon the shore by a few saylers that came from the countries ad­ioyning. But when this Islande in processe of time was well peopled with Portingalles, The King of Portingall sen­deth one to be Bishop of the Isle of S. Tho­mas, and of Congo. and other nations that came thether by licence of the King, and became to be of great trafficke, and was tilled and sowed, the king sent thether a Bishoppe, to gouerne the Christians that were in that Islande, and those also that were in Congo: which the said Bishoppe did accomplish presently vpon his arriuall, and afterwardes in Congo, where hee tooke possession of his Pastorall charge. When he was come into the kingdome of Congo, it was a thing incredible to see,The entertain­ment of the Bishop in Congo. with howe great ioy hee was entertained by the Kinge and all his people. For from the sea side euen vnto the Cittie, being the space of a hundred and fiftie miles, he caused the streetes to bee made smooth and trimme, and to be couered all ouer with Mattes, commanding the people, that for a certaine space seue­rally appointed vnto them, they shoulde prepare the wayes in such sort, that the Bishoppe shoulde not set his foote vpon any part of the grounde which was not a­dorned. But it was a farre greater wonder, to behold all the countrey thereaboutes, and all the trees, and all the places that were higher then the rest, swarming with men and weomen that ran forth to see the Bishop, [Page 152] as a man that was holy and sent from God, offering vn­to him, some of them lambes, some kiddes, some chic­kins, some Partriches, some venison, and some fish, and other kindes of victuailes in such aboundance, that hee knew not what to do withall, but leaft it behind him; whereby he might well know the great zeale and obe­dience of these new Christians. And aboue all other thinges it is to be noted for a memorable matter, that the Bishoppe going on his way, there met him an innu­merable multitude of men, & weomen, and girles, and boyes, and persons of fourescore yeares of age, and a­boue, that crossed him in the streetes, and with singu­lar tokens of true beliefe required the water of Holy Baptisme at his hands: neyther would they suffer him to passe vntill hee had giuen it them: so that to satisfie their desires, hee was greatly stayed in his viage, and was faine to carry water with him in certaine vesselles, and salte, and other prouision necessary for that action.

But I will leaue to report vnto you all the welcome and entertainment, that was made vnto him in euery place where he came, and the liuely ioy that generally and particularly was shewed for the comming of this Bishoppe. And now I will tell you, that hee arriued at the Cittie of Saint Sauiours, where hee was met by the Priestes, and by the king, and by all the Court, and so in procession entred into the Church, & after due thanks giuen to God, hee was conducted to his lodging that was assigned vnto him by the king.The Bishoppe foundeth the Cathedrall Church of S. Crosses. And then present­ly he beganne to reforme & reduce to good order, the Church it selfe, and the Friers, and Priestes that dwell therein: ordayning the saide Church to bee the Cathe­drall [Page 153] Church of Saint Crosses, which at that time had be­longing vnto it twentie and eyght Cannons, with their Chaplens, and a Mayster of the Chappell, with Singers, and Organs, and Belles, and all other furniture meete to execute diuine seruice. But this Bishoppe, who la­boured in the Lords Vineyard, sometimes in Congo, and sometimes in the Isle of Saint Thomas, going and com­ming continually by shippe, the space of twentie daies, and still leauing behinde him his Vicars in the place where he himselfe was absent,The Bishop dyeth. at the last dyed, & was buried in the Island of S. Thomas.

After this Bishoppe succeeded another Bishoppe in Congo, being a Negro, and descended of the blood Roy­all, who before had beene sent by King Alfonso first in­to Portingall, and afterwardes to Rome, where hee lear­ned the Latine tongue, and the Christian Religion, but being returned into Portingall, and landed out of his shippe,The second B. dyeth. to goe and enter vppon his Bishopricke of S. Sauiours, hee dyed by the way: wherevpon the king­dome remained without a Pastor for the space of diuers yeares. Don Piedro also the King aforesaide dyed like­wise without children,The K. Don Piedro dyeth. Don Francesco succeedeth & dyeth. and there succeeded him his brother, called Don Francesco, who in like manner la­sted but a while: and then was created the fift King, named Don Diego, Don Diego the fift King. who was next of all the race Royall: A man of haughtie courage, and magnificall, and wit­tie, of a very good disposition, wise in counsell, and aboue all other qualities, a maintayner of Christian Faith: and in briefe so great a warriour he was, that in few yeares hee conquered all the countries adioyning. He loued the Portingals very much, so that he forsooke the vsuall garmentes of his owne naturall countrey, & [Page 154] attyred himselfe after the Portingall fashion. He was ve­ry sumptuous aswell in his apparell,The K. Diego very sumptu­ous. as also in the orna­ments and furniture of his pallace: he was besides very courteous and liberall, and woulde bestowe largely both vpon his owne subiectes and also vpon the Portin­galles. With great cost woulde hee prouide and buy such stuffe as pleased him, and woulde often say, that Rare thinges shoulde not bee in the handes of any but onely of Kinges. He vsed to weare one suite of apparel but once or twice and then he would giue it away to his follow­ers. Wherevpon the Portingalles perceyuing that he did so greatly esteeme cloth of gold and Arras, & such other costly houshold stuffe, they brought great store therof out of Portingall, so that at that time, Arras-hang­ings, and cloth of gold, and of silke, and such like Lord­ly furniture beganne to bee of great estimation in that kingdome.

In the time of this King, there was a thirde Bishop of Saint Thomas, and Congo, by nation a Portingall, who with the vsuall ceremonies was entertayned both by the way,The third B. of S. Thomas, & of Congo. and also in the Court at Saint Sauiours. And nowe the Deuill, the common enemie of Christian Reli­gion, being much grieued with the happie successe and promoting of the Catholike Faith, beganne to sowe his Darnell of diuision betweene the Friers and Priestes, Dissention betweene the Friers and Priests, & the new Bishop. and their new Bishoppe: which sprung vp and arose from the long libertie, wherein they had nowe liued so many yeares without a Pastor, so that euery man esteemed himselfe not onely to be as good as the Bishoppe, but al­so to be a farre better man then he was: and therefore would yeeld no obedience to their Prelate, in such sort that there was raysed among them so great a discord & [Page 155] dissention, as it wrought a grieuous scandale and wic­ked example among the people. But the king like a good Catholike, and a faithfull, did alwayes maintaine the Bishops part, and to cut of these troubles and stirres he sent some of these Priests to prison into Portingal, and others into the Isle of Saint Thomas, and some others went away with all their substaunce of their owne ac­corde: and by these meanes, the doctrine of these mi­nisters, in steede of encreasing, did greatly diminish through their owne default,

Neyther was our common aduersaries herewithal contented, but woulde needes proceed further by set­ting discorde betweene Kinges and subiectes.After the death of K. Diego, three Princes at once challenge the Kingdom, and all three slaine. For af­ter the death of this King, there started vp three Princes at once to challenge the succession. The first was the Kinges sonne, whom fewe of them fauoured, because they desired to haue another, so that he was slaine in­continently. The two other that remayned were of the bloud Royall: One of them was created King by his fauourites and followers, with the good lyking of the greater parte of the people, but vtterly against the mindes of the Portingalles and certayne of the Lordes, who aymed and endeauoured to set vp the other. In­somuch as the foresaide Lordes, together with the Por­tingalles, went into the Church to kill the King elected: making this reckoning with themselues, that if they slewe him, the other must of necessitie bee made King. But at that very selfe same time, those of the contrary faction had slaine the King that was already made by the Portingalles, perswading themselues assuredly, that he being dead there would bee no difficultie for them to obtaine the state for their King, because there was [Page 156] none other least, that by law could challenge the Scep­ter Royall. And thus in an houre and in two seuerall places were these two Kinges murthered at once.

In these conspiracies and slaughters, when the peo­ple saw,The Portin­galles slaine & dispearsed. that there were no lawfull persons leaft to en­ioy the Royall Crowne, they laide all the blame vpon the Portingals, who were the causers of all these mischiefes: and therevpon they turned themselues against them, and slew as many of them as they could finde: Onely they spared the Priests, and would not touch them, nor any other that dwelt in other places.

Seeing therefore (as before is saide) that there was none of the blood Royal leaft to be placed in the Gouern­ment, Don Henrico created king. they made choice of one Don Henrico, Brother to Don Diego the King deceased. And this Henrico, going to warre against the Anzichi, leaft behinde him in his steede for Gouernour, vnder the title of King, one Don Aluaro, a young man of twentie and fiue yeares of age, sonne to his wife by another husband.K. Henrico di­eth, & Don Aluaro succee­deth: and so the stocke of of the ancient Kings of Con­go ceased. But Don-Hen­rico dyed shortly after the warre was ended, and there­vpon the saide Don Aluaro was with the common con­sent of them all, elected King of Congo, and generally obeyed of euery man. And thus fayled the Royall Stocke of the auncient Kinges of Congo, in the person of Don Henrico.

But Don Aluaro was a man of good iudgement and gouernenent, and of a milde disposition, so that he did presently appease all these tumults in his kingdome, & caused all the Portingals that by the last warres were dis­pearsed ouer all the countries thereaboutes,K. Aluaro re­storeth the Portingals. to bee ga­thered together, aswell religious persons as lay men, & by their meanes hee was much better confirmed in the [Page 157] Catholike Faith then he was before. Moreouer he vsed them very courteously, and cleared them of all faultes that were laide to their charge, declaring vnto them by gentle discourses that they had not beene the occasion of the former troubles, as euery man wold confesse and acknowledge: and to that effect he determined with him selfe to write a large information touching al these accidentes to the King of Portingall, and to the Bishoppe of S. Thomas, which he did accordingly, and dispatched certain Messengers vnto them with his letters. When the Bishoppe of S. Thomas vnderstode these newes, he was very glad thereof,The B. of S. Thomas retur­neth into Congo. and whereas before he durst not ad­uenture to go into the Kingdome of Congo in the heate of all those troubles, he did now presently take ship, and sayled thether, where he imployed himselfe wholly with all his authoritie to pacifie the former dissentions, and to set downe order for all such matters as concer­ned the worshippe of God, and the office of his Priestes. And a while after hee had so done, hee returned to his habitation in the Isle of Saint Thomas, The B. of S. Thomas dieth▪ where by meanes of sicknes he finished his dayes. And this was the third time, that those partes remayned without a Bishop.

Nowe it came to passe,K. Aluaro li­ueth licenti­ously. that for want of Bishoppes, the King and the Lordes, and the people likewise, began to waxe cold in the Christian Religion, euery man addicting himselfe licentiously to the libertie of the flesh, and e­specially the King, who was induced therevnto by di­uers yong men of his owne age, that did familiarly con­uerse with him.Francesco Bul­la Matare an ill companion & counsellour to the King. Among whom there was one princi­pall man, that was both a Lorde, and his kinsman, called Don Francesco Bullamatare, that is to say, Catche-Stone. This man, because he was a great Lorde, and wholly e­stranged [Page 158] from all instructions of Christianitie, walked inordinately after his owne pleasure, and did not sticke to defende openly, That it was a very vaine thing to keepe but one wife, and therefore it were better to returne to their former auncient custome. And so by his meanes did the Deuill open a gate to the ouerthrowe and destruction of the Church of Christ in that kingdome, which vntill that time with so great paine and trauaile had beene there established. But afterwardes the man did so wan­der and stray out of the way of truth, that he fell from one sinne to another, and in the end quite relinquished and abandoned all true Religion. Bullamatare dyeth. Yet at the last the said Francesco dyed, and was solemnely buried like a noble Lorde, in the Churcb of Saint Crosses: although he was notoriously suspected and spotted for his false Reli­gion. But it fell out (and a maruellous case it is, to confirme the righteous in their good belief, & to terrify the wicked) that in the night time certain Spirits of the Deuill vncouered a part of the roofe of S. Crosses Church, where he was enterred, and with a great and horrible noyse, which was heard all ouer the Cittie, they drew him out of his Tombe, and carryed him away. And in the morning the Church doores were found shut, the roofe broken, and the graue without the body of the man. By this extraordinarie signe the King was at the first aduertised of the great fault that hee had com­mitted, and so were the rest also that followed him in his course: but notwithstanding, because there was no Bishop in that kingdome to giue him good counsell, and the King but a young man and vnmarried, although he remained somewhat sound in the Christian Faith, yet he continued still in the licentiousnes of the flesh, vntill [Page 159] such time as God had chastized him with another se­uere discipline, as you shall hereafter vnderstand.

Chap. 5. The incursions of the people called Giachas in the kingdome of Congo. Their conditions and weapons. And the taking of the Royall Cittie.

FOr not long after,What people the Giachas are: Their conditions, & weapons. there came to robbe and spoyle the Kingdome of Congo, certaine nations, that liue after the manner of the Ara­bians, and of the auncient Noma­des, and are called Giachas. Their habitation or dwelling is about the first Lake of the Riuer Nilus, in a prouince of the Empyre of Moenemugi. A cruell people they are and a murderous, of a great stature, and horrible countenance, fed with mans flesh, fierce in battell, and valorous in courage. Their weapons are Pauises or Targates, Dartes and Daggers: otherwise they go all naked: In their fashions and dayly course of li­uing they are very sauage and wilde: They haue no [Page 160] King to gouerne them, and they leade their life in the forrest vnder cabbins and cottages like shepheardes.

This people went wandring vp and downe, de­stroying, and putting to fire and sworde, and robbing and spoiling all the countries that they passed through, till they came to the Realme of Congo, The Giachas spoile the pro­uince of Batta which they en­tred on that side where the Prouince of Batta lyeth. Those that first came forth to make resistance against them, they ouerthrew, and then addressed themselues towards the Cittie of Congo, The Giachas come to the Royall Cittie of Congo. where the King remained at that time in great perplexitie, for this victorie that his enemies had gotten in the Countrey of Batta: yet some comfort hee tooke to himselfe, and went out a­gainst his aduersaries with such souldiers as he had, & in the same place, where in times past Mani-Pango fought with the King Don Alfonso, he ioyned battell with them. In which encounter the King being halfe discomfited, retired into the Cittie, wherein when he perceyued that he could not remaine in good safetie, being vtterly forsaken of the grace of God by reason of his sinnes, and not hauing that confidence in him, that Don Alfonso had, he thought good to leaue it for a pray to his aduersaries, and to betake himselfe io an Is­lande within the Riuer Zaire, called Isola del Cauallo, that is to say,K. Aluaro fli­eth into the Isle of Horses. the Isle of Horse, where hee continued with certaine Portingall Priestes, and other principal Lordes of his Kingdome.The Giachas surprise the Cittie, and rule ouer all the kingdom. And thus were the Giachi become Lords and maisters of the Cittie Royall, and of the whole Realme. For the naturall inhabitants fled away, and sa­ued themselues in the mountains, & desert places: but the enemies burned and wasted, Cittie, and Churches, & all, and spared no mans life, so that hauing diuided [Page 161] themselues into seuerall armies, they ruled and gouer­ned sometimes in one Prouince, and sometimes in ano­ther ouer all the kingdome.

With this persecution did God generally afflict and chastize all the inhabitantes of the saide Kingdome of Congo, the King himselfe, the Lordes, the people, the Portingalles, and their Clergie, euery one in their degree, and calling. As for the poore people, they went wan­dring like vagabondes ouer all the Countrey,The King & those that fol­lowed him, plagued with an extreame famine. and peri­shed for hunger and want of necessaries: And for the Kinge with those that followed him, and had saued themselues in the Islande, they also because the Isle was very little, and the multitude great, were oppressed with so terrible a scarsitie of victuailes, that the most part of them dyed by famine and pestilence. For this dearth so increased, and meate arose to so excessiue a rate, that for a very small pittance (God wot) they were faine to giue the price of a slaue, whome they were wont to sell for tenne Crownes at the least. So that the Father was of necessitie constrayned to sell his owne sonne, and the brother, his brother, and so euery man to prouide his victuailes by all manner of wickednesse. The persons that were solde for the satisfying of other mens hunger, were bought by the Portingal Marchants, that came from S. Thomas with their ships laden with victuailes. Those that sold them, said they were slaues, and those that were solde, iustified and confirmed the same, because they were desirous to be ridde of their greedie torment.Many of the bloud Royall sold for slaues to the Portin­galles. And by this occasion there was no small quantity of slaues, that were borne in Congo, solde vpon this necessitie, and sent to the Isle of S. Thomas, & to Portingall, among whome there were some of the [Page 162] bloud Royall, and some others, principall Lordes.

By this affliction, the King did manifestly learne & know, that all these great miseries and aduersities a­bounded for his misdeedes: and although he was not much punished with hunger,King Aluaro falleth into a Dropsie. because hee was a King, yet he did not escape the cruel infirmitie of the Dropsie, that made his legges to swell exceedingly, which dis­ease was engendred partely by the ayre, and very ill diet, and partely by the moystnesse of the Islande, and so it accompanied him euen vntill his death. But in the meane while, being stricken to the hart with these mis­fortunes and calamities, he conuerted and turned to God, requiring pardon for his offences, and doing pennance for his sinnes: and then was counselled and aduised by the Portingalles that he shoulde sende to re­quest succours of the King of Portingall, K. Aluaro sen­deth to the K. of Portin­gall for succor. by certayne Embassadours, that might recount vnto him all the mis­chiefes which had lighted vpon him. This Embassage was accordingly performed, at the same time that the K. Don Sebastiano began his raign,Don Sebastian the King of Portingal sen­deth succour vnto him. who with great speed and kindnesse sent him succours by a Captaine, called Francesco di Gouea, a man well exercised in diuers wars, both in India, and also in Africa, who lead with him sixe hundred Souldiers, and many Gentlemen Aduenturers, that did accompany him.

Chap. 6. The King of Portingall sendeth aide, and an Embassadour to the King of Congo. The knowledge of the Mettall mines, which abound in Congo, is denyed the King of Portingall. At the same time the King of Congo dispatcheth Embas­sadours to the King of Spaine, to request Priestes of him, & what befell vnto them. He sendeth diuers proofes of the Mettalles. The vow of Odoardo Lopes.

THis Captayne Francesco di Gouea, Francesco di Gouea resto­reth the King, and driueth the Giachas out of Congo. carried with him a commande­ment from his Kinge, that the Islande of Saint Thomas shoulde prouide him ships, and victuails, and whatsoeuer els was requi­site for this enterprise. And with this prouision hee arriued at the last in the Isle of Horse, where the King of Congo was resident. In whose company the Portingalles de­parting from thence, & gathering together all the men of warre in that Countrey, with all speed possible, put themselues onwardes against their aduersaries, and fought with them sundry times in plaine battell, so that [Page 164] at the ende of one yeare and a halfe, they restored the King into his former estate. Which victory they at­chieued in deede by the noyse and force of their Arcu­buses (for the Giachi are exceedingly afraid of that wea­pon) rather then by the valour and strength of their souldiers. And so they were in spight of their teeth driuen out of the Realme of Congo, & but few of them there were that returned home againe to see their frendes.Francesco di Gouea, after foure yeares returneth into Portingal with letters for mo Priestes. But the Portingall Captaine stayed there for the space of foure yeares to settle the King in his King­dome, and then returned into Portingall with letters of request to his King, that hee woulde sende ouer some moe Priestes to vpholde and maintaine the Christian Religion. Howbeit a number of Portingalles, that came by shippe with him, remained behinde him in these Countries, and are at this daye become very rich and wealthie men. And the King being thus established in his former degree, and the Kingdome all in quyet and peace, became a very good Christian, and married the Ladie Catarina, The K. be­commeth a good Christi­an, & marieth. who is yet aliue: by whom he had fower daughters, and by certaine Maide-seruants which he kept, two sonnes and one daughter. And because in those regions the weomen doe not succeede: there remayned as heyre of his kingdome his elder sonne, called also Don Aluaro, who liueth at this day.

During the time,The K. of Por­tingal sendeth to make search in Congo for mettal Mines. that the foresaide Captaine stay­ed in Congo, the King of Portingall Don Sebastiano vn­derstanding, that there were in that Kingdome diuers Caues and Mines of Siluer, of Golde, & other Mettalles, sent thether two persons that were cunning and skilful in that Arte, (for therein they had serued the Castilians in the West) to make search for them, and to drawe [Page 165] some profite thereof. But the King of Congo was by a certaine Portingall, Francesco Bar­buto disswa­deth the King from making the search, & auoydeth it by pollicy. called Francesco Barbuto, that was his Confessour and great familiar, perswaded to the con­trary, that he should not in any case suffer those Mines to be discouered: signifying vnto him, that thereby peraduenture the free enioying and possession of his Kingdome might by little and little be taken quite from him, and therefore aduised him that he woulde cause these skilfull Maisters to bee ledde and guided by some other wayes, where hee knewe there were no Mettall-Mynes to be founde, which he did according­ly. But assuredly, it grew afterwardes to a great mis­chiefe, that the King would not suffer this Arte of dig­ging and melting of mettalles,The inconue­nience of not suffering the mettall mines to be digged & melted. so greatly esteemed o­uer all Europe, to be exercised in Congo. For therevpon beganne the great trade and trafficke in that Countrey to cease, and the Portingall Marchants did not greatly care for venturing thether, or dwelling there any more: and so consequently very few Priestes resorted a­mong them. So that aswell vpon these occasions, as al­so for other such causes afore rehearsed, the Christian Religion waxed so colde in Congo, that it wanted verye little of being vtterly extinguished. But the King Don Aluaro (as it hath beene tolde you) after all these migh­ty afflictions laid vpon him by the hand of God, for the punishment of the sinnes which he had committed a­gainst Religion, had acknowledged his errour, and be­came a good Christian, cherishing the Portingals, whom he called his Sonnes, The K. send­eth new Em­bassadours in­to Portingall for mo priests and doing them all the pleasure hee could. Especially and aboue all thinges hee ceased not, still to sende new Embassadours into Portingall, with earnest request that he might haue moe Priestes, and [Page 166] such as were skilful in the holy Scriptures to maintaine the Catholike Faith, which was now almost vtterly for­gotten in that Realme, onely for want of religious persons, that shoulde teach the people and administer the Sacramentes, and not for any fault of their good willes: for they were meruellously well inclined and affected to the Holy Faith.

After that the aforesaid Captaine was arriued in Por­tingall, The Portingal K. delayeth to send mo Priestes. and had presented the requestes of the King of Congo to his King, (who was also but a young man) he had none other aunswere from him but wordes and promises, that he would haue a care of the matter that was demanded: but in the meane while hee prouided neyther Priests, nor Diuines to be sent for Congo. Where­vpon the King of Congo dispatched againe another principall Embassadour, being his kinseman, called Don Sebastiano Aluarez, The King of Congo sendeth Don Sebastiano Aluarez to en­treat for Priestes, & to redeeme cer­taine of his nobilitie that were in Saint Thomas Isle, & in Portingall. together with a Portingall, to beare him company and entreate for moe Priestes, and with­all to redeeme certaine slaues borne in Congo, that were in the Isle of S. Thomas and in Portingall, and were sold vpon meere necessitie, as wee haue tolde you before. Some of them woulde needes remaine still in volunta­rie seruitude, and many were raunsomed and brought home into their Countrey. By whose good labour and meanes, and especially by the paineful industrie of such as were Lords, & borne of noble bloud, (for some there were of that dignitie among them,) the King of Congo restored the Christian Religion, which was almost lost: and some of them he vsed for Counsellours, and Officers of the Realme, as men that were well practised and experienced in the worlde, by reason of this their long captiuitie. To this Embassadour, the King gaue a [Page 167] gracious aunswere, and tolde him that hee should bee satisfyed according to his request:Don Sebastiano was faine to returne into Congo without any Priestes. But yet for all that, hee was faine to returne home agayne into Congo, without any Priestes or Religious persons to go with him.

Three yeares after,Antonio de gli Oua sent by the Portingall King to be Bishop of S. Thomas, aud Congo. the King Don Sebastiano dispat­ched a certaine Bishoppe (called Don Antonio de gli Oua, being a Castilian borne) principally to the Islande of S. Thomas: but withall he gaue him also a commission to visite the kingdome of Congo: who being arriued at S. Thomas, fell at iarre with the Captayne there, and so say­led into Congo, where hee was also persecuted by the saide Captaine and his frendes that hee had there:He is persecu­ted by the Captain of S. Thomas For they informed the King, that hee was an ambitious man, of a haughtie spirite, and very obstinate, & there­by did vtterly discredite him with the King and all his Court: Wherevpon being induced therevnto by these accusations,He is honora­blie receyued by the K. of Congo. the King forbad him at the first to enter within his Realme, but afterwardes he receyued him with great honour, and sent his sonne to entertain him, and to accompany him to the Cittie. There he stayed about eyght monethes, and then departed againe, somewhat before the King of Portingall passed into Africa, and leaft behinde him in Congo, two Friars, and fower Priestes. Don Sebastian K. of Portin­gal ouerthro­wen in Africa, & Don Henrico the Cardinall succeedeth. The Bishoppe being thus gone, & the King ouerthrowen in Africa, there was exalted to the Crowne of Portingall, Don Henrico the Cardinall, to whome the King of Congo did write, with great in­staunce, and earnest request; that he would send him some religious personnes, and Preachers: but he could obtaine nothing at his handes, because the Cardinall liued but a short time in that Gouernement.

[Page 168] After Don Henrico succeeded Phillip King of Castile, Philip K. of Spaine succee­deth the Cardinall▪ K. Philip sen­deth Sebastia­no di Costa to Congo to signifie his arriuall to the Crowne of Portingall. who sent aduertisementes to the Captain of Saint Tho­mas, that he was inuested in the Crowne of Portingall, and letters also to the King of Congo, to the same effect. Wherevpon the Captaine did presently dispatch one Sebastiano di Costa, that with the title of Embassadour, shoulde carry these newes and letters vnto the saide King. When these letters were presented, and all complementes performed,The King of Congo offereth K. Philip of Spaine the dis­couery of the Mettall mines in Congo, with request for Priestes. the king of Congo returned him againe to the Court to king Phillip, with answere of his letters, and therein proffered to discouer vnto him the mettall mines, which heretofore had beene concealed from all the other kinges his predecessors, and withal sent him diuers trialles of them: Beseeching him especially with all affectionate entreatie, that (as soone as possiblie he could) hee woulde furnish him with some store of Priestes: declaring also vnto him the miserable state and condition, whereinto his peo­ple were fallen,Costa dyeth by the way, and his message knowen by let­ters that were found. by reason of the troubles that had happened about the Christian Religion. But Costa died by the way, the vessell wherein he sayled being cast a­way vpon the shore of Portingall, and euery man drow­ned that was in it: and the naughtie newes were know­en by the contentes of the Letters, that were found in a little chest, which was driuen on land by the waues of the sea: & by a briefe note of such Commissions, as he had in charge to deliuer to the king.The King of Congo sendeth Odoardo Lopez to the King of Spaine, & to the Pope with letters of cre­dence, and instructions. When the king of Congo hearde of this accident, hee did not cease, but still continued and perseuered in his godly purpose, & woulde not suffer Christianitie to bee vtterly extingui­wed in his Kingdome, as it was very likely to be. And therefore he determined yet once again to send a new [Page 169] Embassadour of his owne to the King of Spaine. But forasmuch as there arose some difficulties and differen­ces among some Lordes of the Court, that desired this honour, the king because he woulde not displease any of them, by preferring one of them before another, made choice of one Odoardo Lopez a Portingall borne, from whose mouth Pigafetta tooke this present report, and put it in writing. This man had dwelt now a good time in those Regions, and was well experien­ced in the affaires of the worlde, and being by good chaunce at that time in the Court, he was thus emploi­ed with the good fauour and countenance of the king: who deliuered vnto him in writing very ample instru­ctions, for all matters whereof hee was to treate, as well with his Catholike Maiestie in Spaine, as also with his Holinesse at Rome: together with very earnest letters of credence, and authoritie, and commoditie to them both, and safe conductes, and exemptions in all liber­ties, both within and without, besides his effectuall re­commendations of him to all other Christian Princes, with all such other priuileges and declarations, that might shew how dearly the king esteemed his person, as to an Embassadour in such causes appertaineth.

The summe of his Embassage was this: The Emba­sage of Odoar­do Lopez to the K. of Spain That he should present his Letters to the King Don Phillip, and at large discourse vnto him the state, wherein the kingdome of Con­go stoode touching matter of Religion, by the reason of the former warres, and scarcitie of Priestes, and therevpon re­quest his Maiestie to prouide him a competent number of Confessors, and Preachers, that might bee sufficient to main­taine the Gospell in those remote Countries, being but lately [Page 170] conuerted to Christianitie. Moreouer that he should shew vnto him the sundrie trialles of Mettalles, which hee had made, and many other matters, which were worthie to bee knowen: and withall that he should proffer vnto him in his name, free & liberal trafficke of them, which heretofore was euer denyed to his Predecessors.His Embas­sage to the Pope. Touching the Pope, That he should likewise on his behalfe kisse his feete, deliuer vnto him his letters, and recount the miserable trouble and detriment that his people had suffered for the Christian Faith. That he shold recōmend those poor soules to his Holines, & beseech him as the Vniuersal Father of all Christians, to haue com­passion vpon so many faithful persons, who because they had no Priestes to deliuer the holy Faith vnto them, and to admini­ster the wholesome Sacramentes, were by little and little falling into euerlasting perdition. And being thus dis­patched, he departed from the Court, and went about certaine seruices for the King, wherein he spent about eyght Monethes: So that in Ianuary, being then Som­mer time in Congo, he embarked himselfe in a vessell of a hundred Tunne burthen, which was bound with her lading for Lisbone.

Now as he sayled, he came to the sea of the Islands of Cape Verde, Odoardo Lopez at the Islandes of Cape Verde. where the vessell being somewhat olde, began to take in much water, at a leake that was open in the foreship. So that the wind blowing very luste­ly and strongely before, and the Saylers being not a­ble eyther to reach the Islandes aforesaid, or to gayne the firme lande of Africa, much lesse (though they woulde neuer so fayne) to follow on their voyage, by sayling on with the halfe ship, and to straine the vessel that leaked so much, the Pilot thought it better to turne [Page 171] his course, and taking the wind in the poope, to goe & saue themselues in the Islandes of Noua Hispania. And so after terrible stormes, and extreame dangers of drowning, and of perishing with hunger for want of all kinde of meate,The Isle of Cubagoa. they arriued with much adoo at a little Islande, called Cubagoa, and situate ouer against the Isle of Saynt Margarete, The Isle of S. Margarete. where they fish for Pearles. From thence, when they had in some haste amended their shippe, and somewhat refreshed themselues, they say­led with a short cut to the firme lande, and tooke ha­uen in a Porte called Cumana, or (as it is called by ano­ther name) The new kingdome of Granado in the West In­dies. Cumana or the new kingdom of Granada in the West Indies The ship sunk in the hauen. This battered and wetherbeaten vessell was no sooner arriued in this safe harbour, but it sunke present­ly to the bottome, but the persons that were in her were all saued, although afterwardes they fell sicke to the death by reason of the great griefe, which they had endured in hunger, in thirst, and in want of all o­ther sustenance, and chiefly by the horrible stormes of that tempestuous Ocean.

While the foresaide Embassadour endeauoured in this place to recouer his former health,Odoardo Lopez stayeth in Cu­mana a yeare and a halfe. the company of shippes which is called La Flotta, that is to say, the Fleete, and vseth euery yeare to sayle from the coast for Castile, departed from thence, so that he was con­strayned to stay for a new Nauie, and so consumed a whole yeare and a halfe without doing any good. In this meane time the King of Congo, hauing neuer re­ceyued any tydinges of this his Embassadour Odoardo, but accounting him for dead, and not knowing that he was driuen by tempest into the West Indies, continued [Page 172] still constant in his former purpose, to procure some re­medy for Christianitie in his kingdome.The King of Congo sendeth Don Piedro Antonio, and Gaspar Diaz a Portingal, with the same Embassage which hee sent by Lopez. And there­fore hee sent another Embassadour, with the selfe same commandements, called Don Piedro Antonio the se­conde person in all his Realme, and with him one Gas­paro Diaz, a Portingall borne, a principall man and very rich, and an auncient inhabitant in that Countrey, to the ende that hee shoulde accompany the saide Don Piedro, and suffer him to want nothing, and in any case ioyne his good helpe to procure, that the request, which he hoped to obtain of the king of Spaine, might be fully effected: with a further expresse commandement, that if they did meete with the saide Signor Odoardo, they should deale in their businesse with his aduise & coun­sell.Don Piedro taken by the English, and by misfortune drowned, and his sonne with him. But an infortunate end had this Embassadour, for he was taken at sea by Englishmen, and his shippe also, which being drawen towardes Englande, when it was neere vnto the Coast, by great misfortune it ranne a­thwart the shoare, ane there Don Piedro Antonio & his sonne were both drowned: but the Portingal and some fewe others with him escaped,Gaspar Diaz escaped and arriued in Spaine: but re­turned into Congo without doing any thing at all. and arriued in Spaine, at such time as the said Odoardo was come to the Court, & had entred vppon the charge of his Embassage. And therefore this Gasparo wrote to Odoardo, that hee was minded to returne home into Congo, and not to goe to the Court at all: whether it were for the death of the Cardinall, or for any other respect, I cannot tell, but home he returned in deed, as he said he would.

In the time that our Signor Odoardo remained in the West India, which is situate vnder the same skie, and vnder the same climate, and of the same temperature [Page 173] of ayre, that Congo is subiect vnto: hee noted that the colour of the skinnes of the inhabitants in both coun­tries was farre different:The blacknes of a mans skinne, is not caused by the heat of the sunne. For in Congo, they are general­ly and for the most parte blacke, and in India almost white, that is to say, of a middle colour, betweene white and blacke, which the Spaniardes call Mulato, Browne, or Darke-Tawney. Whereby he would signifie, that it is not caused by the Sunne, as it hath beene re­corded of long time, but that it commeth of nature it selfe, who worketh it by some secreat reason, which neuer yet to this day, eyther by auncient Philosopher, or new writer, hath beene fully set downe or vnder­stoode.

When he had recouered his health,Odoardo Lopez sayleth to San Domingo. he sayled to the Porte of the Cittie of San Domingo in the Island of Hispaniola, that there at the first passage he might take some shippe that went towardes Castilia: and by good chaunce he found a Portingall vessell, among the rest of the Nauie, which was minded to ioyne with the Fleete of shippes, that passed from the firme lande to Castilia, and so to goe in good companie and better safetie.Lopez in a Portingal ship commeth with the fleete to Terzera, to S. Lucar, to Siuile, & so in­to Portingal. All these shippes being thus vnited together, they arriued by the helpe of a very good winde, at Terzera, which is one of the Islandes called Azores, that is to say, the Sparre-Haukes. and from thence to San Lucar di Barameda, which is a hauen in the mouth of the Riuer Guadalchibir, and so to Siuile: from whence he tooke his iourney into Portingall to see his frendes, and to furnish himselfe with all thinges necessarie for his businesse,Lopez goeth to the Spanish Court in Ma­drill. and at the last hee rode to the Court, which was at that time in Madrill. There hee was courteously entertained by his Catholike Maiestie, to [Page 174] whom he propounded the contents of his Commissi­ons. But diuers great accidentes there happened, & many difficulties that crossed him, and altogether hin­dered the course of those affaires, which hee had to ac­complish in the name of the King of Congo. For first hee hearde the dolorous newes of the Kinges death,Aluaro King of Congo dieth that sent him on this message: and then the King Don Philip was wholly busied about the conquest of Eng­land, K. Philip busi­ed about the conquest of England. so that this busines went nothing forwardes, but was delayed from time to time: neyther did he see any meanes of dispatch, but rather hee was giuen to vnder­stand, that for that time they could not intende to har­ken vnto him.

Now the foresaide Odoardo, being afflicted with so many aduersities,Odoardo Lopez chaungeth his kind of pro­fession. began to call to mind the innumerable perilles that he had passed, and the deadly infirmi­tie wherewith he was plagued, after that long, & hor­rible nauigation. He saw that he was sometimes cast downe, and sometimes exalted: and knew that in this worlde there was none other rest or quiet, but in God Almightie. He was greatly oppressed with hart griefe, which he did dayly and continually endure, because he could not relieue the necessities wherewith the peo­ple of Congo were vexed and troubled, and manifestly perceyued, that those poore soules incurred the ex­treame daunger of falling into the vtter darkenesse of hell. He considered the great expenses, that euery day must be defrayed at the Court for the maintenance of himselfe and his familie. Lastly, he was wholly de­priued of all hope, that he should euer be able to bring that matter to effect, which the king of Congo had im­posed vpon him. And therefore he made choice of [Page 175] another course, that was not onely profitable for him, but also most wholesome for his soule. For the good Angell had touched his harte, and caused him with a manly courage to abandon the Sword, and to take the Crosse vpon him: and therevpon hee renounced the worlde with all the deceitfull pompe and glorie thereof; and in Madrill apparelled himselfe in a graye course habite,Lopez goeth to Rome▪ where he was kindly enter­tayned by the Pope. and so went to Rome, to declare to Six­tus Quintus the Pope the tenor and Commission of his Embassage, because he would not altogether neglect the good intent and meaning of the King, that had sent him, although he were now descended into a better life. He was kindly welcomed and receiued by his Holines, to whom hee discoursed the miserable estate, wherein the Christian people of the Realme of Congo did stand, for want of the worship and seruice of God, and also the small number of Priestes, that were there to instruct them in the doctrine of the Gospel, and to de­liuer vnto them the Sacraments of the Church, especial­ly the multitude in that countrey being (as it were) innumerable, that euery day resorted together, to bee baptised, instructed, confessed and communicated. Moreouer he made a vowe and resolued in his minde,The vow of Odoardo Lopez to erect a Se­minary, & an Hospitall in Congo. that with such store of wealth, as God had blessed him withall in Congo (which was not very small) he would builde a house, wherein for the seruice of God, there should dwell certaine learned men, and sundrie Priests, to instruct the youth of those Countries in all good languages, and in the arts liberal, and in the doctrine of the Gospell, and in the misteries of our saluation. Out of which house, as it were out of a holy Schoole, there might come forth from time to time, many learned [Page 176] men and well studied in the law of God, that shoulde be able in their owne naturall Countrey tongue, to a­waken and raise againe the Faith of Christ, which was now asleepe, and dried vp in those Regions: and there­by in processe of time there woulde spring vp many fruits of blessing, & vigilant soules in the Christian Faith. Herevnto he ment also to adde an Hospitall, that might be a recourse and harbor for Gods poore, which com­ing and sayling out of strange Countries should haue re­liefe and entertainment in that Hostelry, and there be cured and restored of their infirmities and necessities. With this purpose therefore he went to Rome, to ob­teyne of his holynes a licence to erect this Seminary and Hospitall, and to beseech him also that he would graunt him Iubilies, Indulgences, and other Dispensations, that for such Christian and wholsom works are requisite, espe­cially to the vse & benefit of those Countries, which are so remote from Christendome. He presented himselfe to the Pope, & deliuered vnto him his letters of credence, and then declared vnto him at large the tenor of his Commissions,The Pope re­mitteth the whole matter to the K. of Spaine. wherein he had a gracious audience. But when the Pope did vnderstand that the king­dome of Congo belonged to the king of Spaine, he remitted that matter wholly vnto him.

Chap. 7. Of the Court of the King of Congo. Of the apparell of that people before they became Christians and after. Of the Kinges table, and manner of his Court.

HEtherto we haue manifestly dis­couered the beginning of Christi­an Religion in Congo, The auncient apparell of the King of Congo and his Courtiers. & consequent­ly the strange accidents that hap­pened therein. And now it is time to discourse & lay open the man­ners and fashions of that Court, & other customes and conditions appertayning to that Realme. In auncient time this King and his Courti­ers were apparelled with certaine cloath made of the Palme-Tree, (as we haue tolde you before) wherewith they couered themselues from the girdlesteed downe­wardes, and girded the same streyght vnto them with certaine girdles made of the same stuffe, very faire and well wrought. They vsed also to hang before them, like an apron, certaine delicate and dainty skinnes, of [Page 178] little Tygres, of Ciuet-Cattes, of Sabelles, of Marternes, and of such like creatures for an ornament: and for a more glorious pompe and shew, they did weare vpon their shoulders a certaine cape like a Whoode. Vpon their bare skinne they had a certaine rounde garment like a Rotchet, which they call Incutto, reaching downe to their knees, made after the manner of a net, but the stuffe of it was very fine cloth of the said Palme-Tree, & at the skirtes there hung a number of threede-tasselles, that made a very gallant shew. These Rotchets were turned vp againe, & tucked vpon their right shoulder, that they might be the more at libertie on that hande. Vpon that shoulder also they had the taile of a Zebra, fastned with a handle, which they vsed for a kinde of brauery, according to the most auncient custome of those partes. On their heades they wore cappes of yellow and redde colour, square aboue and very little, so that they scarcely couered the toppes of their heads, and worne rather for a pompe and a vanitie, then to keepe them eyther from the ayre or from the Sunne. The most part of them went vnshodde: but the King and some of the great Lords did weare certaine shooes of the olde fashion, such as are to be seene in the anci­ent Images of the Romanes, and these were made also of the woode of the Palme-Tree. The auncient apparell of the maaner sort. The poorer sorte and the common people were apparelled from their middle downewardes, after the same manner, but the cloath was courser: and the rest of their bodie all na­ked. The women vsed three kindes of trauerses, or (as it were) aprons: beneath their girdlesteed. One was very long and reached to their heels: the second short­er then that, and the thirde shorter then both the o­ther, [Page 179] with fringes about them, and euery one of these three was fastened about their middle, and open be­fore. From their breastes downewardes, they had another garment, like a kinde of dublet or iacket, that reached but to their girdle: and ouer their shoulders a certaine cloake. All these seuerall garmentes were made of the same cloth of the Palme-Tree. They were accustomed to goe with their faces vncouered, and a little cappe on the head, like a mans cappe. The mea­ner sorte of weomen were apparelled after the same manner, but their cloth was courser: Their Maid-ser­uantes and the basest kind of women were likewise at­tyred from the girdle downeward, and all the rest of the bodie naked.

But after that this kingdome had receyued the Chri­stian Faith, Their new kind of appa­rell. the great Lords of the Court beganne to ap­parell themselues after the manner of the Portingalles, in wearing cloakes, Spanish Capes, and Tabards or wide Iackets of Scarlet, and cloth of Silke, euery man accor­ding to his wealth and abilitie. Vpon their heads they had hats, or caps, and vpon their feet Moyls or Pantof­fles, of Veluet and of Leather, and buskins after the Por­tingall fashion, and long Rapiers by their sides. The common people, that are not able to make their appa­rell after that manner doe keepe their olde custome. The women also go after the Portingall fashion, sauing that they weare no cloakes, but vpon their heads they haue certaine veyles, and vpon their veyles blacke vel­uet cappes, garnished with iewelles, and chaines of golde about their their neckes. But the poorer sorte keep the old fashion: for onely the Ladies of the Court doo bedecke themselues in such manner as wee haue [Page 180] tolde you.

After the King himselfe was conuerted to the Chri­stian Religion, The Court of Congo now imitateth the Court of Portingall. hee conformed his Court in a certaine sorte after the manner of the King of Portingall. And first for his seruice at the table when he dyneth or sup­peth openly in publike, there is a Throne of Estate erected with three steppes, couered all ouer with Indian Tapistrie, and therevpon is placed a Table, with a chaire of Crimzen Veluet, adorned with bosses and nailes of Golde. Hee alwaies feedeth alone by him­selfe, neyther doth any man euer sit at his table, but the Princes stand about him with their heads couered. He hath a Cupborde of Plate of Gold and Siluer, and one that taketh assay of his meat and drinke. He maintaineth a guarde of the Anzichi, and of other nations, that keep about his pallace, furnished with such weapons as are aboue mentioned: and when it pleaseth him to goe a­broade, they sounde their great instrumentes, which may▪ bee hearde about fiue or sixe miles, and so signifie that the King is going forth. All his Lords do accom­pany him, and likewise the Portingalles, in whom hee reposeth a singular trust: but very seldome it is that he goeth out of his pallace.

Twice in a weeke hee giueth audience publikely, yet no man speaketh vnto him but his Lordes. The custome; and lawes of Congo. And because there are none, that haue any goods or lands of their owne, but all belongeth to the Crowne, there are but few suites or quarelles among them, sauing peraduenture about some words. They vse no writing at all in the Congo tongue. In cases criminall they pro­ceede but slenderly, for they doo very hardely and seldome condemne any man to death. If there be a­ny [Page 181] ryot or enormitie committed against the Portingals by the Moci-Conghi, (for so are the inhabitants of the Realme of Congo called in their owne language,) they are iudged by the lawes of Portingall. And if any mis­chiefe bee founde in any of them, the king confineth the malefactor into some desert Island: for he thinketh it to bee a greater punishmente to banish him in this sorte, to the end he may doe pennance for his sinnes, then at one blow to execute him. And if it so happen that those which are thus chastized, doe liue tenne or twelue yeares, the King vseth to pardon them, if they be of any consideration at all, and doeth imploy them in the seruice of the State, as persons that haue beene tamed and well schooled, and accustomed to suffer any hardenesse. In Ciuill disagreements there is an order, that if a Portingall haue any suite against a Moci-Congo, he goeth to the Iudge of Congo: but if a Moci-Congo doe impleade a Portingall, hee citeth him before the Consul or Iudge of the Portingalles: for the King hath graunted vnto them one of their owne nation to be Iudge in that countrey. In their bargains between them and the Portingalles, they vse no writinges nor other instrumentes of billes or bondes, but dispatch their businesse onely by word and witnesse.

They keepe no histories of their auncient Kinges nor any memoriall of the ages past, because they can­not write. They measure their times generally by the Moones. They knowe not the houres of the day nor of the night: but they vse to say, In the time of such a man such a thing happened. They reckon the distan­ces of countries not by miles or by any such measure, [Page 182] but by the iourneyes and trauell of men, that goe from one place to another, eyether loaden or vnloaden.

Touching their assembling together at feastes,Their man­ner of assem­blies. or other meetinges of ioy, as for example, when they are marryed,Their instru­ments of Musicke. they sing Verses and Ballades of Loue, and play vppon certaine Lutes that are made after a strange fashion. For in the hollowe parte and in the necke they are somwhat like vnto our Lutes, but for the flat side, (where wee vse to carue a Rose, or a Rundell to let the sounde goe inwarde) that is made not of wood, but of a skinne, as thinne as a bladder, and the stringes are made of hayres, which they draw out of the Elephantes tayle, and are very strong and bright: and of certaine threedes made of the woode of Palme-Tree, which from the bottome of the instrument doe reach and ascende to the toppe of the handle, and are tyed euery one of them to his seuerall ringe. For to­wardes the necke or handle of this Lute, there are cer­taine rings placed some higher and some lower, where­at there hange diuers plates of Iron and Siluer, which are very thinne, and in bignesse different one from a­nother, according to the proportion of the instru­ment. These ringes doo make a sounde of sundrie tunes, according to the striking of the stringes. For the stringes when they are striken, doo cause the rings to shake, and then doo the plates that hang at them, helpe them to vtter a certayne mingled and confused noyse. Those that play vppon this Instrument, doo tune the strings in good proportion, and strike them with their fingers, like a Harpe, but without any quill very cunningly: so that they make thereby (I cannot [Page 183] tell whether I shoulde call it a melodie or no, but) such a sounde as pleaseth and delighteth their sences well enough. Besides all this (which is a thing very ad­mirable) by this instrument they doo vtter they con­ceites of their mindes, and doo vnderstande one ano­ther so plainely, that euery thing almost which may be explaned with the tongue, they can declare with their hande in touching and striking this instrument. To the sounde thereof they do dance in good measure with their feet, and follow the iust time of that musicke with clapping the palmes of their handes one against the other. They haue also in the Court, Flutes and Pipes, which they sound very artificially, and accor­ding to the sounde they daunce and moue their feet, as it were in a Moresco, with great grauity and sobrietie. The common people doe vse little Rattles, and Pipes, & other instrumentes, that make a more harsh and rude sound, then the Court-instruments do.

In this kingdome,Their Phisick. when any are sicke, they take nothing but naturall phisicke, as Hearbes, and Trees, and the barkes of Trees, and Oyles, and Waters and Stones, such as Mother Nature hath taught them. The Ague is the most common disease that raigneth among them: and plagueth them in Winter by reason of the continuall raine, that bringeth heat and moysture with it more then in Sommer, and besides that the sick­nes which here we cal the French disease, & Chitangas in the Congo tongue, is not there so daungerous and so harde to be cured, as it is in our Countries.

They heale the Ague with the poulder of a wood,Their medi­cine for an Ague. called Sandale, or Saunders, whereof there is both redde [Page 184] and gray, which is the woode of Aguila. This poul­der being mingled with the oyle of the Palme-Tree, and hauing annointed the bodie of the sicke person two or three times withall from the head to the foote,Their medi­cine for the head-ache, & other griefes of the body, is letting of blood. the partie recouereth. When their head aketh, they let bloude in the temples, with certaine little boxing hornes: first by cutting the skinne a little, and then applying the Cornets therevnto, which with a sucke of the mouth, will be filled with bloud: and this man­ner of letting bloude is vsed also in Aegipt. And so in any other parte of a mans body, where there is any griefe,Their medi­cine for the French pocks. they drawe bloude in this fashion and heale it. Likewise they cure the infirmitie called Chitangas, with the same vnction of Saunders: whereof there are two sorts, one redde (as we tolde you) and that is called Tauila: the other gray, and is called Chicongo: and this is best esteemed, for they will not sticke to giue or sell a slaue for a peece of it.Their Purga­tions. They purge themselues with certaine barkes of trees, made into powder, and taken in some drinke: and they will worke mightely and strongly. When they take these purgations, they make no great account for going abroade into the ayre.Curing of woundes. Their woundes also they commonly cure with the iuyce of certaine hearbs, and with the hearbs themselues. And the sayde Signor Odoardo hath af­firmed vnto me, that he sawe a slaue, which was stab­bed through with seauen mortall woundes of an Ar­row, and was recouered whole and sound, onely with the iuyce of certaine hearbes, well knowen vnto them by experience. So that this people is not encumbred with a number of Phisicians, for Surgery, for Drugges, [Page 185] for Sirruppes, for Electuaries, for Playsters, and such like Medicines, but simply doe heale and cure them­selues with such naturall Plantes as grow in their owne Countrey. Whereof they haue no great neede nei­ther: for liuing (as they doo) vnder a temperate cly­mate, and not ingorging themselues with much va­rietie of meates to please their appetites, nor surchar­ging their stomackes with wine, they are not greatly troubled with those diseases, that commonly are engendred of meates and drinkes that remaine vndigested.

Chap. 8. Of the Countries, that are beyonde the Kingdome of Congo towardes the Cape of Good-Hope: and of the Riuer Nilus.

NOw that we haue seene the King­dome of Congo, and the conditi­ons both of the Countrey and people that dwell therein, and al­so of the nations therevnto ad­ioyning, it remayneth that wee discourse a little further, and that with all breuitie, of the rest of A­frica, towardes the Cape of Good-Hope, all along the Ocean, whereby they vse to sayle into India euen as farre as the redde sea: and then we will returne backe againe into the Inlande, and treate of the Riuer Nilus, and of Preti-Gianni, and of all his kingdomes: to the ende, that so farre, as our matter will beare, we may make a perfecte relation of those Regions, which hi­therto haue not so well and so rightly been conceaued of euery man. Beyond the Kingdome of Congo, we haue signified vnto you, that there are other countries [Page 187] belonging to the King of Angola, and beyond that to­wardes the Cape of Good-Hope, The kingdom of Matama. a King called Matama, who ruleth ouer diuers Prouinces, which are called Quimbebe. This Realme (as we tolde you) from the first Lake and the confines of Angola, contayneth all the rest of the countrey Southwardes, till you come to the Riuer of Brauagul, R. Brauagul▪ R. Magnice. The moun­taines of the Moone. which springeth out of the moun­taines of the Moone, aud ioyneth with the Riuer Mag­nice, and that springeth out of the foresaide first Lake: These mountaines are diuided by the Tropicke of Ca­pricorne, towardes the Pole Antarctike, and beyonde this Tropike lyeth all the Countrey and borders of the Cape of Good-Hope, which are not ruled and gouerned by any one Kinge, but by diuers and sundry seuerall Princes. In the middest betweene that Cape and the Tropike, are the saide Mountaines of the Moone, so fa­mous and so greatly renowned among the auncient writers, who do assigne them to be the originall head and spring of the Riuer Nilus: which is very false and vntrue, as the situation of the countrey doth plainely shewe, and as wee a little hereafter will discouer vnto you. This Countrey is full of high and rough moun­taines: it is very coulde, and not habitable: It is fre­quented and haunted with a few persons that liue after the manner of the Arabians, vnder little cabbins in the open fieldes, and apparelled with the skinnes of cer­taine beastes. It is a sauage and a rusticall nation, with­out all faith and credite, neyther will they suffer any straungers among them. Their furniture is Bowes and Arrowes. They feede vpon such fruites, as the lande breedeth, and also vpon the flesh of beastes.

[Page 188] Among these Mountains of the Moone, there is a Lake called Gale: The Lake Gale. a very little one it is, and lyeth somewhat towardes the West. Out of this Lake there issueth a Riuer called Camissa, Camissa 1. The sweet Riuer. and by the Portingalles named The sweete Riuer, which at the point of the Cape of Good-Hope voydeth it selfe into the sea, in that very place that is termed The False Cape. The False Cape. For the shippes of the Indies sayling that way, doo first discouer another greater Cape, which is called The Cape of the Needles, and then afterwardes this lesser Cape: The Cape of the Needles. Wherevpon they call it The False Cape, because it is hidde and couered with the true and great Cape. Betweene these two Capes or Promontories, there is the distance of an hundred miles, contayning the largenesse and breadth of this famous Cape: which being deuided into two points, as it were into two hornes, it maketh a Gulfe, where sometimes the Portingall shippes doe take fresh water, in the Riuer that they call the Sweet Riuer.

The inhabitantes of this coast, which dwell be­tweene these two points,Another note, That the co­lour of blacke in mens skins doeth not pro­ceed from the heat of the Sunne. are of colour blacke, although the Pole Antarctike in that place be in the eleuation of thirtie and fiue degrees, which is a very strange thing: yea the rude people that liue among the most colde mountains of the Moone are blacke also. This I write of purpose, to aduise and moue the Philosophers and such as search the effectes of nature, that they would fall into their deepe contemplation and speculation, & therevpon teach vs, whether this blacke colour be oc­casioned by the Sunne, or by any other secrete and vn­knowne cause: Which question I for this time doe meane to leaue vndecided.

[Page 189] Now forasmuch as this Promontory of Good-Hope, is the greatest Cape of all,The Cape of Good-Hope very dange­rous. and stretcheth out into the Sea farther then any other in the whole vniuersall worlde, and is very daungerous to passe (as all Pro­montories are:) and for that also the sea is there most terrible, and from the lande there blow most horrible winds, which cause that Ocean to be exceedingly tem­pestuous and stormie, so that many Portingall shippes of admirable burthens, haue beene cast away therein: and lastly, because the auncient Historiographers did neuer knowe it, no not so much as by hearesay, and it is not long ago since the King of Portingalles Fleetes did first discouer the same: It shal not be impertinent, but rather a matter of great conuenience in this place to decipher the measure thereof, & to make so manifest a declaration of it, as may serue also to vnderstande, how great the nauigation is from Portingall into India, by compassing the Coast of the Cape of Good-Hope one­ly, almost the space of sixe thousande miles, as a little hereafter it shall be shewed vnto you,

For from the Riuer of Ferdinando Poo, where the said Cape beginneth to iut-out into the sea,This is a Point of the Cape of Good-Hope. as farre as to the Poynt, which we call the Point of Needles, there is con­tayned vpon the shoare more then two thousande and 200. myles from the North, to the South, and on the contrary side, from the said Point to the Cape of Guarda-Fuy, right ouer against the Islande of Socotora, they rec­kon more then three thousande and three hundred miles by the coast from the South to the North. So that from Lisbone, compassing about the shoares of Africa, and all the Cape of Good-Hope, vnto the kingdome of [Page 190] Goa, there are moe then fifteene thousand miles. And from thence afterwardes to Malaca, and to China, and so forwardes, there remayneth so long a iourney, that neuer yet in any time hetherto hath there beene so great and so daungerous a nauigation vndertaken and performed, as this of the Portingalles, neyther with great vesselles nor with small.Why it is cal­led the Cape of Good-Hope. It is called the Cape of Good-Hope, because all such as saile that way, aswell in going forth, as in returning home, doo especially & principally ayme at this marke, that they may passe and get beyonde this Promontorie; which when they haue doone, they account themselues to bee out of all daunger, and as it were to haue performed their iour­ney. And vpon this their generall desire, they gaue it the name of the Cape of Good-Hope.

Nowe to returne to our purpose, and to talke further of the Coast of Africa, beyonde the Cape or Poynt of the Needelles, there are many competent har­boroughes and hauens,Seno Formoso. Seno del Lago. the principall whereof is Seno Formoso, The faire Bay: and Seno del Lago, The Bay of the Lake: For there the sea maketh a certaine Gulfe, where­in are sundry Islandes and Portes: and somewhat be­yonde there runneth into the sea the Riuer of S. Chri­stopher, Riuer of Saint Christopher. and at the mouth thereof there lye three pret­tie Islettes. A little further forwardes, the Coast run­neth all along by a Countrey,Terra do Nadal. which the Portingalles call Terra do Natal, the Land of the Natiuitie, because it was first discouered at Christmasse: Capo della Pes­cheria. and so reacheth to the Cape called Della Pescheria. Betweene which Cape and the Riuer Magnice, R. Magnice. The King­dome of But­tua. within the Land is the Kingdome of Buttua. whose Territories are from the [Page 191] rootes or bottome of the mountaines of the Moone, vn­till you come to the riuer Magnice towards the North, The Kingdom of Monomotapa R. Brauagul. where the countrey of Monomotapa standeth, and west­wardes from the Riuer Brauagul towardes the sea all a­long the bankes of the Riuer Magnice. Store of Gold Mines. In this king­dome there are many mynes of Golde, and a people that is of the same qualities and conditions, that the people of Monomotapa is, as hereafter shall bee shewed vnto you. And so going along the shores of the Oce­an, you come to the Riuer Magnice, which lyeth in the very entraunce of the Kingdome of Sofala, and the Empire of Monomotapa.

Chap. 9. Of the Kingdome of Sofala.

THis Kingdome beginneth at the Riuer Magnice, which springeth out of the first Lake of Nilus, The originall of the Riuer Magnice. and conueyeth it selfe in­to the sea in the middest of the Bay, betweene the point Pesche­ria and the Cape called Capo delle Correnti, situate in twentie and three degrees & a halfe of the Pole Antarctik vnder the Tropike of Capricorne. With this Riuer neere vnto the sea,Three Riuers runne into Magnice. there ioyne three other notable riuers, the principall whereof is by the Portingalles called Saynt Christophers, because vpon the day of that Saintes feast it was first discouered,1. R. Nagoa. but by the inhabitantes it is na­med Nagoa. 2. R. Margues. The second tooke the name of one Lo­renzo Margues, that first found it. These two Riuers do spring originally from the mountains of the Moone, so greatly renowned among the auncient writers, but by the people of the country they are called Toroa: out of which Mountains they did thinke that famous Nilus [Page 193] tooke also his beginning: but they were vtterly decey­ued. For (as we haue already tolde you) the first Lake ariseth not out of those Mountaines,Nilus ariseth not out of the Mountaines of the Moone. but lyeth a great way distant from it: and betweene it and them is there a very great and a huge low plaine. Besides that, the streames that flow from the said mountaines do runne towardes the East, and bestow their waters vpon other great Riuers, so that it is not possible for them to passe into the foresaide Lake, much lesse into Nilus, considering especially that the Riuer Magnice springeth out of that first Lake, and by a farre different course from the course of Nilus, runneth towards the East, and so ioyneth it selfe with the two Riuers afore­saide.3. R. Arroe. The thirde is called Arroe, and ariseth on another side out of the Mountaines of the Gold-Mines of Monomotapa: and in some places of this Riuer there are founde some small peeces of Golde among the sand. These three Riuers enter into the great Magnice neere vnto the sea, and all fower together doo make there a great water, in a very large channell, and so dischar­geth it selfe into the Ocean. From the mouth of this riuer all along the sea coast,The R. of Cuama. stretcheth the kingdome of Sofala vnto the Riuer Cuama, which is so called of a certaine castel or fortresse that carryeth the same name, and is possessed by Mahometans and Pagans: but the Portingalles call it, The mouthes of Cuama: because at the entry into the sea, this riuer diuideth it self into seauen mouthes, where there are fiue speciall Islandes, besides diuerse others that lie vp the riuer, all very full and wel peopled with Pagans. This Cuama commeth out of the same Lake, and from the same springs from whence Nilus floweth. And thus the Kingdome of Sofala is [Page 194] comprised within the saide two Riuers, Magnice and Cuama vpon the sea coast.The kingdom of Sofala. It is but a smal Kingdome, and hath but few howses or townes in it: The chiefe and principall head whereof, is an Islande that lyeth in the riuer called Sofala, which giueth the name to all the whole Countrey. It is inhabited by Mahometans, and the King himselfe is of the same secte, and yeeldeth obedience to the Crowne of Portingall, because he will not be subiecte to the Empire of Monomotapa. And therevpon the Portingalles there doo keepe a Forte in the mouth of the riuer Cuama, and doo trade in those Countryes for Golde, and Iuory, and Amber, which is founde vppon that Coast,The commo­dities of Sofa­la Gold, Iuory and Amber. and good store of slaues, and in steede thereof they leaue behinde them Cotton-Cloth, and Silkes that are brought from Cambaia, and is the common apparell of those people.The Inhabi­tants of Sofala The Maho­metans that at this present do inhabite those Countries are not naturally borne there, but before the Portingals came into those quarters, they trafficked thether in small barkes from the Coast of Arabia Foelix. And when the Portingalles had conquered that Realme, the Mahometans stayed there still, and nowe they are become neyther vtter Pagans, nor holding of the secte of Mahomet.

From the shoars and Coast, that lyeth betweene the two foresaide riuers of Magnice and Cuama, The Empire of Monomotapa full of Gold-Mines. within the land spreadeth the Empire of Monomotapa, where there is verye great store of Mines of Golde, which is carryed from thence into all the regions thereaboutes, and into Sofala, and into the other partes of Africa. And some there be that wil say, that Salomons Golde, Salomons Gold. which he had for the Temple of Ierusalem, was brought by sea out of [Page 195] these Countreyes. A thing in truth not very vnlikely: For in the Countries of Monomotapa, there doe remain to this day many ancient buildings of great worke and singular Architecture, of Stone, of Lime, and of Timber, the like whereof are not to be seene in all the Prouinces adioyning.

The Empire of Monomotapa is very great, and for people infinite.The people of Monomotapa. They are Gentiles and Pagans, of co­lour blacke, very couragious in warre, of a middle sta­ture, and swift of foote. There are many Kinges, that are vassalles and subiectes to Monomotapa, who doe of­tentimes rebell and make warre against him. Their weapons are bowes and arrowes, and light dartes. This Emperour maintayneth many Armies in seuerall Prouinces,The K. of Monomotapa maintaineth many Armies. deuided into Legions, according to the vse and custome of the Romanes. For being so great a Lord as he is, he must of necessitie be in continuall warre, for the maintenance of his estate. And among all the rest of his souldiers, the most valorous in name are his Legions of women, whom he esteemeth very highly, and accounteth them as the very sinewes and strength of his military forces. These women do burne their leaft pappes with fire,Left-handed Amazons. because they should bee no hin­deraunce vnto them in their shooting, after the vse and manner of the auncient Amazones, that are so greatly celebrated by the Historiographers of former prophane memories. For their weapons they practise bowes and arrowes: They are very quicke and swift, liuely and couragious, very cunning in shooting, but especi­ally and aboue all venturous and constant in fight. In their battelles they vse a warlike kind of craft and sub­tiltie: For they haue a custome to make a shew that [Page 196] they would flie and runne away, as though they were vanquished and discomfited, but they wil diuers times turne themselues backe, and vexe their enemies migh­tely with the shot of their arrowes. And when they see their aduersaries so greedie of the victory, that they beginne to dispearse and scatter themselues, then will they suddenly turne againe vpon them, and with great courage and fiercenes make a cruell slaughter of them. So that partely with their swiftnes, and partely with their deceitful wiles and other cunning shifts of warre, they are greatly feared in all those partes. They doo inioy by the Kinges good fauour certayne Countries where they dwell alone by themselues: and sometimes they choose certaine men at their owne pleasure, with whom they doo keepe company for generations sake: So that if they doo bring forth Male-children, they sende them home to their fathers housen: but if they be female, they reserue them to themselues, and breed them in the exercise of warfare.

The Empire of this Monomotapa lyeth (as it were) in an Islande, The situation of the Empire of Monomotapa. which is made by the Sea-coast, by the Ri­uer Magnice, by a peece of the Lake from whence Mag­nice floweth, and by the Riuer Cuama. It bordereth towardes the South vpon the Lordes of the Cape of Good-Hope before mentioned, and Northwarde vpon the Empire of Moenemugi, as by and by shall be shewed vn­to you.

But now returning to our former purpose, that is to say,The kingdom of Angoscia. to runne forwardes vpon the sea-coast, after you haue passed ouer some parte of the Riuer Cuama, there is a certaine little Kingdom vpon the sea called Angoscia, which taketh the name of certaine Islandes there so cal­led [Page 197] and lie directly against it. It is inhabited with the like people, both Mahometans and Gentiles, as the King­dome of Sofala is. Marchaunts they are, and in small vesselles doo trafficke along that coast, with the same wares and commodities, wherewith the people of So­fala doo trade.

A little beyonde,The kingdom of Mozam­bique. suddenly starteth vp in sight the Kingdome of Mozambique, situate in fourteene degrees and a halfe towardes the South, and taketh his name of three Islands, R. Meghincate that lie in the mouth of the Riuer Meghin­cate, where there is a great hauen and a safe, and able to receiue all manner of shippes. The Realme is but small, and yet aboundeth in all kind of victuailes. It is the common landing place for all vesselles that sayle from Portingall, and from India into that Countrey. In one of these Isles, which is the chiefe and principall, called Mozambique, and giueth name to all the rest, as also to the whole kingdome,The Island of Mozambique. and the hauen aforesaide, wherein there is erected a Fortresse, guarded with a garrison of Portingalles, wherevpon all the other For­tresses that are on that Coast doo depende, and from whence they fetch all their prouision: all the Armadas and Fleetes that sayle from Portingall to the Indies, if they cannot finish and performe their voyage, will go and winter (I say) in this Island of Mozambique: and those that trauell out of India to Europe, are constrained of necessitie to touch at Mozambique, to furnish them­selues with victuailes. This Island, when the Portin­galles discouered India, was the first place, where they learned the language of the Indians, & prouided themselues of Pilots to direct them in their course.The inhabi­tants of Mo­zambique. The people of this kingdome are Gentiles: Rusticall and [Page 198] rude they be & of colour blacke. They go all naked. They are valiaunt and stronge Archers, and cunning Fishers with all kinde of hookes.

As you go on forwardes vpon the foresaide coasts, there is another Islande called Quiloa, The kingdome of Quiloa. in quantitie not great, but in excellency singular: For it is situate in a very coole and fresh ayre: It is replenished with trees that are alwaies greene, and affordeth all varietie of victuailes. It lyeth at the mouth of the Riuer Coauo, which springeth out of the same Lake from whence Ni­lus floweth, and so runneth about sixtie miles in length, till it commeth neere to the sea, and there it hath a mightie streame, and in the very mouth of it maketh a great Islande, which is peopled with Mahometans and Idolaters, and a little beyonde that towardes the Coast on the West you may see the said Island of Quiloa. This Islande is inhabited with Mahometans also,The Island of Quiloa, & the inhabitants thereof. which are of colour something whitish. They are well apparel­led, & trimly adorned with cloth of silke and Cotton: Their women do vse ornaments of Gold, and Iewelles about their handes and their neckes, and haue good store of houshold stuffe made of siluer. They are not altogether so black as the men are: and in their limmes they are very well proportioned. Their houses are made of Stone, and Lime, & Timber, very well wrought and of good architecture, with gardens and orchardes full of hearbes and sundry fruites. Of this Islande the whole Kingdome tooke the name, which vppon the Coast extendeth it selfe from Capo Delgado, (the Cape Delicate, that bordereth Mozambique & Quiloa,) & is si­tuate in nine degrees towards the South, & from thence it runneth out vnto the aforesaide Riuer of Coauo. [Page 199] In olde time the Kingdome of Quiloa was the chief­est of all the Principalities there adioyning, and stoode neere to the sea: but when the Portingalles arriued in those countries, the King trusted so much to himselfe, that he thought he was able with his owne forces not onely to defend himselfe against them, but also to driue them from those places which they had already sur­prised.The King of Quiloa ouer­throwen by the Portingals, and driuen out of the Island. Howbeit the matter fell out quite contrary. For when it came to weapons, hee was vtterly ouer­throwen and discomfited by the Portingals, and so fled away. But they tooke and possessed the Island, and enriched themselues with the great spoyles and boo­ties that they found therein. They erected there also a Fortresse, which was afterwarde pulled downe by the commandement of the King of Portingall, because hee thought it not necessary, considering that there were others sufficient enough for that Coast.

And here we may not leaue behinde vs the Isle of S. Laurence, The commen­dation of the Isle of S. Lau­rence. so called by the Portingalles, because they did first discouer it vpon that Martyrs feast day. It is so great,Historia della China. Part. 3. Cap. vltimo. La grand' Isola di S. Lorenzo lunga 275. leghe & larga 90. id est, that it contayneth in length almost a thou­sande miles, and standeth right ouer against the coast which we haue described, beginning directly at the mouthes of the Riuer Magnice, which are in twenty and sixe degrees of the South, and so going forwardes to the North, it endeth right against the mouthes of Cu­ama in the kingdome of Quiloa. The great Island of S. Laurence is in length 275. leagues, and in breadth 90. leagues. The last Chapter of the historie of the Kingdome of China, printed in Macao, the first Latine booke that euer was printed in China maketh men­tion of this Island by the name of Madagascar, in these words Madagascar trecentas fere leucas comprehendit, id ist, Madagascar containeth almost 300. leagues. Between this Island and the firme lande there is (as it were) a channell, [Page 200] which at the entrie Westwarde is three hundred and for­tie miles broade, in the middest where it is narrowest ouer against the Islande of Mozambiche an hundred and seuentie miles, and for the rest it enlargeth it selfe very much towards India, and contayneth many Isles within it. The ships that go from Spaine into India, or returne from India to Spaine, doo alwayes for the most parte passe and saile in and through this channell, if by time or weather they be not forced to the contrary. And surely this Islande deserueth to be inhabited with a bet­ter people, because it is furnished with singular com­modities. For it hath many safe & sure hauens. It is wa­tred with sundry Riuers that cause the earth to bring forth fruits of diuers kinds, as Pulse, and Ryce, and other graine, Oranges, Limons, Citrons, and such like fruite. Flesh of all sorts, as Hennes &c. and venison, as wilde Boare and Deere, and such like, & all this of a very good tast and relish,The inhabi­tants of the Isle of Saint Laurence. because the soyle is very fat: their fish al­so is exceeding good. The inhabitants are Pagans, with some of the sect of Mahomet among them. They are of the colour which the Spaniardes call Mulato, Their wea­pons be­tweene blacke and white. Very warlicke they are & giuen to their weapons, which are bowes and arrows, and dartes of very light wood, strengthned with Iron, whereof they make the heads of their dartes, which are crooked like hookes: and these they wil cast and throw most slightly and cunningly. They vse also Targattes and Iackes that are made of certain beasts-skins, where­with they saue themselues in fight from the blowes of their enemies. This Islande is deuided among seueral Princes, that are at enmitie one with another: for they are in continuall warres, and persecute one another [Page 201] with Armes. There are diuers mynes of Gold, of Sil­uer, of Copper, of Iron, and of other Mettalles, The sauage people doo not vse to saile out of the Island, but onely from one side to the other they goe coasting a­long the shoares, with certaine barks that are made but of one stocke of a tree, which they hollowe for that purpose. The most part of them doo not willingly entertaine straungers, neyther will they consent that they shoulde trafficke or conuerse with them. Not­withstanding in certaine portes, the Portingalles do vse to trade with the Islanders for Amber, Sundry Islands in the channel Waxe, Siluer, Cop­per, Ryse, and such other thinges, but they neuer come vpon the lande. In the channell before mentioned there are diuers Islandes, some greater, and some lesse, inhabited with Mahometans. The chiefe of them is the Isle of Saint Christopher, and then of Santo Spirito: & another called Magliaglie, and so the rest, as the Isles of Comoro, The kingdom of Mombaza rich in Gold & Siluer, and Pearle. Anzoame, Maiotto, and some other.

But let vs returne to the sea side, and prosecute the Coast of the kingdome of Quiloa where we leaft. Next vnto it, is the kingdome of Mombaza, in the height of three degrees and a halfe towardes the South, which taketh the name from an Islande inhabited with Maho­metans, which is also called Mombaza, where there is a fayre Cittie, with houses that haue many Sollers, fur­nished with pictures both grauen and painted. The king thereof is a Mahometan, The cittie of Mombaza spoyled as Quiloa was. who taking vpon him to resist the Portingalles, receyued the same successe that happened to the king of Quiloa, so that the city was ran­sacked & spoyled by his enemies, who found therein good store of Gold, and Siluer, and Pearle, and Cloth of Cotton, and of Silke, and of Golde, and such other com­modities. [Page 202] This kingdome lyeth betweene the bor­ders of Quiloa, and Melinde, and is inhabited with Pa­gans and Mahometans, and yeeldeth obedience to the Empire of Mohenemugi.

A little beyond,The kingdom of Melinde. is the Kingdome of Melinde, which being likewise but a little one, extendeth it selfe vpon the sea coast as farre as the Riuer Chimanchi, and lyeth in the height of two degrees and a halfe: and vp the streame of that riuer it reacheth to the Lake Calice, the space of an hundred miles within lande. Neere vnto the sea along the bankes of this riuer, there is a great deale of Countrey inhabited by Pagans and Ma­hometans, The tayle of a sheepe in Melinde way­eth commonly 25. or 30. pound. of colour almost white. Their houses are built after our fashion. But there is one particulari­tie to be admired, that their Muttons or Sheep are twice as great as the Sheepe of our countrey: for they deuide them into fiue quarters,Leo Aser af­firmeth that he hath seene tayles of Egyptian Sheepe, that weighed 50. l. a peece, and sometimes 120. l. a peece. (if a man may so call them) & reckon the tayle for one, which commonly wayeth some twentie and fiue, or thirtie pounde. The wo­men are white and sumptuously dressed after the Ara­bian fashion, with cloth of Silke. About their neckes and handes, and armes, and feete, they vse to weare iewelles of Gold, and Siluer: When they go abroade out of their houses,The women & inhabitants of Melinde. they couer themselues with Taffa­ta, so that they are not knowen but when they list themselues. In this Countrey there is a very good hauen, which is a landing place for the vesselles that saile through those seas. Generally, the people are ve­ry kinde, true and trustie, and conuerse with strangers. They haue alwayes entertained and welcomed the Portingals, and haue reposed great confidence in them, neyther haue they euer offered them any wrong in a­ny [Page 203] respect.

In the sea betweene these two Capes of Mombaza, Three Isles 1. Monsie. 2. Zanzibar▪ 3. Pemba. and Melinde there are three Isles: The first is called Monsie, the second Zanzibar, and the thirde Pemba, all inhabited onely with Mahometans, that are of colour white. These Isles abound in all things as the others doo, whereof we made mention before. These peo­ple are somewhat enclyned to armes: but they are in deed more addicted to dresse & manure their ground: For there groweth much Sugar, which in small barkes they carry away to sell into the firme lande with other fruites of that Countrey.

Besides these three realmes last described, Quiloa, Melinde, and Mombaza, within the Lande is the great Empire of Moenemugi, towards the West. It bordereth vpon the South, The Empire of Mohenemu­gi. with the kingdome of Mozambique, and with the Empire of Monomotapa to the riuer Coauo, vpon the West with the riuer Nilus, betweene the two Lakes; and vpon the North it ioyneth with the Empire of Prete Gianni. Towardes the sea, this Emperour standeth in good termes of peace with the foresaide kings of Quiloa, Melinde, and Mombaza, by reason of their trafficke together, and the better to secure the en­tercourse and trade by sea: by meanes whereof they haue brought vnto them much cloth of Cotton, and cloth of Silke from diuers Countries, and other mar­chandises that are well esteemed in these partes: and particularly certaine little balles, that are made in the kingdome of Cambaia, of a kind of Bitumen or clammie Clay, like vnto glasse, but that it is (as it were) of a red colour, which they vse to weare about their neckes, [Page 204] like a payre of beades in steed of necklaces. It serueth them also in steede of Money, for of Gold they make none account. Likewise with the silks that are brought vnto them, they doo apparell themselus from the gir­dle downewardes. In exchaunge and barter of all these commodities, they giue Gold, Siluer, Copper and Iuorie.

But on the other side towardes Monomotapa, there are continuall warres, yea and sometimes so blooddy, that it is hardely discerned who hath gotten the victo­rie. For in that border there meet together two of the greatest and most warlike powers and forces that are in all those regions: that is to say, on the party of Mo­nomotapa there came forth into the field the Amazones, of whom wee tolde you before, and on the partie of Mohenemugi are the Giacchi, (as the Moci-Conghi do call them) but in their owne tongue they are called Agagi, The Giaechas, or Agagi. who did sometime so greatly afflict the king­dome of Congo, as you may remember. Neyther are these people lesse couragious or strong then the Ama­zones, but are of a blacke complexion, and presump­tuous countenances. They doo vse to marke them­selues aboue the lippe vpon their cheekes with certain lines which they make with Iron instruments and with fire. Moreouer, they haue a custome to turne their eye liddes backewardes: so that their skinne being all blacke, and in that blacknes shewing the white of their eyes, and those marks in their faces, it is a strange thing to behold them. For it is in deede a very dreadfull & diuelish sight. They are of bodie great, but deformed and liue like beastes in the fielde, and feede vpon mans [Page 205] flesh. In fight they shew themselues exceedingly cou­ragious, and doo vtter most horrible shouting and crying, of purpose to daunte and affray their enemies. Their weapons are Dartes, and Pauises of Leather that couer all their whole bodie, and so defend themselues therewith. Sometimes they will encampe together, and sticke their Pauises in the grounde, which are vnto them in steed of a trench: Sometimes they wil go for­wardes in the battell, and shrowde themselues vnder them, and yet annoy their aduersaries with the shot of their dartes. And thus by warlike pollicie they doo ordinarily plague their enemies, by endeauouring with all subtiltie to make them spende their shotte in vaine vpon their Targettes: and when they see that they haue made an ende of shooting, then doo they renew the battell a fresh, and driuing them to flight, make a cruell slaughter of them without all mercie. And this is the manner which they vse against their e­nemies,The Amazones▪ and the Amazones. But the Amazones on the other side, which are very well acquainted herewith­all, doo fight against them with other militarie strata­gems (as we haue aboue declared) and doo ouercome the forces of their aduersaries with their swiftnes and great skill in matters of warre. For they doo assure themselues, that if they be taken they shalbe deuoured: and therefore with doubled courage they fight for life, that they might ouercome, and in any case saue their liues from that fierce and cruell nation. And in this sorte doo they maintaine continuall warre, al­wayes with great mortalitie on both sides. These Agags dwell at the beginning of the Riuer Nilus, (where it [Page 206] runneth Northwardes out of the Lake,) vpon both the bankes of the Riuer, till it come to a certaine limite, wherein they are bounded, and then Westwardes all o­uer the banks of the said Nilus, euen to the second Lake, & to the borders of the empire of Prete-Gianni. Touch­ing these Agags, I thought it conuenient in this place to adde all this, which before I had omitted. Between the confines of this Moenemugi, and Prete-Gianni, there are sundry other pettie Lordes, and people that are of a white colour, and yeeld obedience sometimes to one of these two Princes, and sometimes to the other. They are men of a farre greater stature then all the rest of the people in those Countries.

Chap. 10. The rest of the Coast of the Ocean to the redde Sea. Of the Empire of Prete Gianni, and the Confines thereof. Of the famous Riuer Nilus, and the origi­nall spring thereof.

ANd now to returne to our former treatise of the coast, beyond the Realme of Me­linde, towardes the Cape of Guarda-Fuy, there are many places inhabited with Ma­hometans, all along the sea side, of colour being white. Vpon this shoare there are diuers good hauens,Many good hauens. where the shippes of sundry countries doo trafficke with the foresaide marchaundises. The first of these places is called Patee, the seconde Braua, the third Magadoxo, the fourth Affion, The Cape of Guarda Fuy. and the last is the famous Promontory and Cape of Guarda-Fuy: which because it is very great, and iutteth out a good way into the sea, is wel knowen to all saylers that come from India, and from Ormuz, & [Page 208] from Arabia Foelix. It is the place and harborough where the Portingalles are wont to attend, and yearely with their nauies to watch for the vesselles of the Ma­hometans, that being laden with precious marchaundi­ses, doo saile into those partes without their licence, they being the Lordes of the trafficke and trade for spicery and all other commodities that are brought from India. So that euery yeare the Portingall Fleete doth take great prises of Marchauntes shippes in that place, as the English and the French doo at Cape Saint Vincent.

After you haue compassed about the foresaid Cape of Guarda-Fuy, Diuers Ports on the sea coast towards the Red Sea. towarde the redde sea, you shall come to other Townes and hauens of the Mahometans. The first of them is called Methe, and another beyond that called Barbora. And this is the furthest place, wherein you shall finde any people with white skinnes: for here the men beginne to bee all blacke. Then there is Ceila, & Dalaca, and Malaca, and Carachin: and all this Coast is called in that Countrey language Baragiam. The people that inhabite therein are all blacke, valiant in armes, and apparelled from the girdle downewards with cloth of Cotton: but those that are of the best ac­count among them doo weare vppon their shoulders certaine cloakes with whoodes, called Bernussi, such as the olde Romanes vsed, and were termed Saga Romana. It aboundeth in Gold, and in Iuory, and in Mettalles, & in victuailes of all sortes.

Then follow the mouthes or entrances into the red Gulfe, The Red Sea. otherwise called the Redde Sea, well knowen to euery man. In number they are two, caused by an Islande that lyeth betweene them, and is called Babel­mandel. [Page 209] The one of them towards the West is fifteene miles broade,The two en­trances into the redde sea. and hath a deep channell, and through this doo all the great shippes enter: the other is a little one, and contayneth in breadth but fiue miles, and yet is full of shallowes and shelfes of sande, and some Rockes: so that the whole mouth is but thirtie myles in all. The one Cape on the side of Africa is called Rosbel, and the other towardes Arabia Foelix, is Ara. From this place all the Westerne Coast of the said Gulfe runneth vp to Suez, The length of the red sea, 1200, miles. which is the farthest towne there­of Northwardes, and is distant from these mouthes twelue hundred miles. All this Gulfe, both on the one side and on the other neere to the bankes, is much pestered with Islettes and shelfes that are very shallow, and affordeth free and safe nauigation but onely in the middest. For the sea following the motion & streame of the Ocean, with great swiftnes doth keepe the chan­nell and the bottome in the middle, very cleane and neat, by casting vp the filth and sande vpon the bankes on both sides.

And now forasmuch as we are to speake of the Em­pire of Prete Gianni, The Empire of Prete Gian­ni. who is the greattest and the rich­est Prince in all Africa, let vs tell you in briefe, that his State and Gouernement at this day reacheth from the two mouthes of the redde sea, vnto the Island of Syene, which is vnder the Tropike of Cancer, excepting the Coastes of the said sea. For about fiftie yeares ago he lost them by negligence, and suffered the Turke to take them from him. So that the Confines of his estate are these, viz. towards the North-East, and the East, the greater parte of the Red Sea: towards the North, Aegypt: [Page 210] towardes the West, the Desertes of Nubia, and towards the South the countrey of Mohenemugi: & so in a grosse and generall account, the Empire of this Christian King may happely bee in compasse some foure thousand miles. The principall Cittie, where hee most remay­neth and keepeth his Court,Bel-Malechi his chiefe Cittie. is called Bel-Malechi. He ruleth ouer many Prouinces that haue their seuerall Kinges.He is very rich▪ His estate is very rich, and aboundeth in Golde, in Siluer, in precious stones, and in all sortes of mettalles. His people are of diuers colours, as white, blacke, and a middle colour betweene both: they are of a very good stature, and haue good countenances. His Courtiers and Lordes are apparelled with cloth of Silke, and adorned with Golde and sundry Iewelles. There is among them a lawe for apparell,A law for ap­parell. according to the seuerall degrees of men. For certaine persons there are, for whome it is not lawfull to weare any o­ther garment, but such as are made of dressed skins.

These people are in a manner Christians. His people are Christians. For they doo obserue certaine ceremonies of the Lawe of the Hebrewes. A great solem­nitie vpon the feast of the Assumption of our Ladie. Vpon the Feast day of our Ladie in August, all the Kinges and principall Lordes assemble themselues together in the Cittie aforesaid, to celebrate that feast, euery man bringing with him his tribute that he oweth to the King, and the people comming from all partes in pilgrimage to performe this their de­uotion. They haue a very solemne procession, and out of the Church, from whence they walke, they carry with them an Image of the Blessed Virgin the Mother of God, which is as bigge as any common person, and all of Gold. This Image hath for the eyes two very rich [Page 211] and great Rubies, all the rest of the bodie is garnished & adorned with iewels and curious workes: and it is car­ryed vpon a frame made of Golde, of a wonderfull and admirable workmanshippe. In this procession also, there commeth abroade in publike shew Prete Gianni, himselfe, eyther vpon a Charriot of Gold, or els vpon an Elephant, all garnished and trimmed with iewelles, and such rare and precious thinges, and couered all ouer with cloth of Golde. The multitude of people that runneth to see this Image, is so great, that many are stiffled in the presse and die therevpon.

This King is called by a corrupt terme Prete Iani, The right name of Prete Gianni. for the right name is Bel-Gian. Now Bel signifieth that which is chiefest, perfectest, and excellentest in a­nything, and Gian is a Prince, or a Lorde, and is applyed to euery man that hath a Gouernement and iurisdiction, and therefore Belgian is asmuch to say, as The Chiefest Prince: and being so ioyned together in one worde, it appertayneth to the King alone, and to no man else. He beareth also the surname of Dauid, as the Emperours of Rome doo vse the name of Cesars.

Now it remayneth that we doo discourse of the ri­uer Nilus, The Riuer Nilus. which doth not spring in the Countrye of Bel-Gian, much lesse out of the mountains of the Moone, nor (as Ptolomie writeth) out of the two Lakes, Ptolemie dis­proued. which he setteth down in Parallele, from the East to the West, with a distaunce of about foure hundred and fiftie miles be­tweene them. For in the altitude of the same Pole, wherein the said Authour placeth those two Lakes, ly­eth also the kingdome of Congo and of Angola towards the West, and and on the other side Eastward is the Em­pire of Monomotapa, and the Kingdome of Sofala, with [Page 212] a distaunce from sea to sea of twelue hundred miles. Now within all this space, as Signor Odoardo affirmed vnto me, there is but one onely Lake to bee founde, which lyeth in the confines of Angola and Monomotapa, and contayneth in Diameter an hundred ninetie and fiue miles. Of the Westerne side of this Lake, the peo­ple of Angola do giue sufficient information, and of the other side Eastwarde, those of Sofala and Monomota­pa. So that there is a ful and perfect knowledge of this one Lake, but of any other thereabouts, there is no mention at all made: And therefore it may well bee concluded, that there are none other to be founde in that altitude of degrees, True it is in deede, that there are two Lakes, but they are situate in places quite con­trary to that which Ptolemie writeth. For he (as it hath beene told you) placeth his Paralleles from West to East: but these are situate from the South to the North, as it were in a direct line, with the distance of about foure thousand miles betweene them. Some that dwell in those countries do holde an opinion,Nilus doth not hide him selfe vnder the ground, and then arise a­gaine, as some say. that Nilus after it is issued out of the first Lake, hideth it selfe vnder the grounde, and afterwardes riseth againe: but others doo deny that it is so. Signor Odoardo did iustifie it to me, that the true history and certainty of this matter, is that Nilus doth not hide it selfe vnder the grounde, but that it runneth through monstrous and desert val­leyes without any setled channell, and where no people inhabiteth,The true spring of Ni­lus is out of the first Lake▪ and so (they say) it sinketh into the bottome of the earth.

From this first Lake in deed doth Nilus spring, which lyeth in twelue degrees towardes the Pole Antarctike, & is compassed about like a vault, with exceeding high [Page 213] mountaines, the greatest whereof are called Cafates vp­on the East, The second Lake. and the hilles of Sal-Nitrum, and the hilles of Siluer on another side, and lastly with diuers other Mountaines on the thirde part. This Riuer Nilus run­neth for the space of 400. miles directly towardes the North, and then entreth into another verye great Lake which the inhabitantes doo call a Sea. It is much bigger then the first, for it contayneth in breadth two hundred and twentie miles, and lyeth vnder the line Equinoctiall. Of this second Lake the Anzichi, who are neere neighbours to Congo, doo giue very certaine and perfect information, for they trafficke into those partes.The people that dwelleth about the second Lake. And they report that in this Lake there is a peo­ple, that sayleth in great shippes, and can write, and vseth number, and weight and measure, which they haue not in the partes of Congo; that they builde their houses with stone and lime, and that for their fashions and qualities they may bee compared with the Portin­galles. Wherevpon it may bee well gathered, that the Empire of Prete-Gianni cannot bee farre from thence.

From this second Lake the riuer Nilus runneth for­wardes to the Islande of Meroe, The Island of Meroe. for the space of seauen hundred miles, and receyueth into it sundry other ri­uers.The R. Coluez. The principall of them all is the riuer Coluez, so called, because it issueth out of a Lake of the same name, and situate in the borders of Melinde. After that Nilus is come to Meroe, it deuideth it selfe into two braun­ches, and so compasseth about a good high Territory, which is called Meroe▪ Vpon the right hand whereof towardes the East, there runneth a Riuer named Abag­ni, The R. Abagni▪ that springeth out of the Lake Bracina, and crosseth [Page 214] ouer the Empire of Prete Gianni till you come to the said Islande: and on the other side Westwarde there are diuers other Riuers,The R. Sara­boe. among which Saraboe is one. When Nilus hath thus receiued these riuers into it, & hath compassed the Islande with both his armes, hee waxeth greater then he was before, and meeteth againe in one channell, and by Aethiopia (which is called Ae­thiopia aboue Aegypt) runneth to the Falles (as they call them) which lie in a very lowe valley, that is very nar­rowe and straite, and shutteth the riuer within a very little channell,The Isle of Syene. so that it falleth from aloft downewards with a most horrible noyse, neere to the Isle of Syene. And from thence watring all Aegypt, it disgorgeth his streames into the Mediterranean sea,The two braunches of Nilus falling into the Me­diterranean sea. (which lyeth di­rectly ouer against the Islande of Cyprus) by two of his principall braunches, the one called at this day, the Mouth of Damiata on the East, and the other, the Mouth of Rossetto on the West.

And forasmuch as wee are nowe come to the very ende of this discourse concerning Nilus, it will be very conuenient,The cause of the encrease of Nilus. that wee touch in briefe the occasion of his encrease. As we haue tolde you before, the prin­cipall cause of the encrease of Nilus, is the great quan­tity of waters, that raine from heauen at such time as the spring beginneth here in these countries, but there with them in winter, which may be (to speake gene­rally) about the beginning of April. This water falleth not, as the water falleth in these Regions of Europe, but it falleth most aboundantly, and commeth downe not in smal drops like our raine, but is powred down (as it were with pailes and buckets.) So that because it falleth with so great violence and in so great a quantity, the [Page 215] earth cannot sucke it vp, nor drink it in: for the ground being ragged, and somewhat bending downward, the water scowreth away with an exceeding furie, and running into the riuers causeth them to swell and to rise in a maruellous manner, and so ouerflowe the coun­trey: You must herewithall consider especially, that they haue these continuall raines for the space of fiue whole Moones together, that is to say in Aprill, May, Iune, Iuly, and August, but principally in May, Iune and Iuly: for then are the waters in their greatest pride. And herevpon it commeth to passe, that the Countrey be­ing full of mountaines and very high hilles (as hath beene told you) and consequently replenished with diuers brookes, and rillets, and Lakes, they all ioyning and meeting together in the channelles of the greater Riuers, doo make them so great and so large, that they containe and carry more water, then all the Riuers of the vniuersall worlde: and the Lakes growe to such an excessiue compasse and widenes, that it is a wonder: as may be seene in the discourse touching the Cape of Good-Hope, and all these kingdomes of Congo, and the Countreyes there adioyning, where there are Lakes of so extraordinarie a bignesse, that in the languages of those Regions, they are not called Lakes, but Seas.

And thus you see how the Riuer Nilus, in the times and seasons before mentioned,The seuerall courses of sundrie great Riuers. on the one side doeth runne most furiously from those Countries, into the North to water Aegypt, and the Riuer Zaire, and the Ri­uer Nigir on the other side Westwarde and Eastwarde: and towardes the South, other huge and monstrous Ri­uers, which at certaine determined and limited times doo neuer faile to encrease as Nilus doeth. And this [Page 216] is the effect of them, which is ordinarily seene euery yeare, especially in Cairo, and ouer all Aegypt, where Nilus beginneth to ryse about the ende of Iune, and continueth his rising till the twentith of September, as I haue seene my selfe. But the occasion and cause of this encrease hath beene vntill this present time very secret and obscure: [...]. 1. The Riuer that falleth from head. Hom. Odis. 4. and although the ancient writers, begin­ning euen at Homere, haue after a sorte and in generall tearmes leaft in writing, that Nilus doeth increase by raine, yet haue they not so distinctly and plainely dis­coursed thereof, as Signor Odoardo hath done, and te­stified the same by his owne view and knowledge. For some there were, that haue assigned the cause of this ouerflowing, to bee the raine that commeth from the Mountaines of the Moone: Others haue attributed it to the snowes that are melted in those Mountaines, & yet Nilus doth not swell or ryse any thing neere to the Mountaines of the Moone, but a great way from them towards the North: and besides that the season of win­ter doeth rather breed Snow, then yeeld any heate to melt it.

And now that I haue with good diligence enqui­red of Signor Odoardo these matters aboue written,The conclusi­on of this booke. vp­on such pointes as I had before plotted to my selfe, and hee also propounding the rest vnto mee of his owne meere motion, like a man of high conceite (as in truth he is) and satisfying me with such aunsweres, as are set downe in this discourse: yet I doo assure my selfe, that euery man will not rest fully contented and satisfyed herewith, especially such as are curious, and practised in matters of the worlde, and skilfull in the Sciences. The Geographer woulde peraduenture desire to vnder­stand [Page 217] more, and the Phisician, and the maister of Mine­ralles, and the Historiographer, and the Marchaunt, and the Marriner, and the Preacher, and some others that are different from these in respect of their profession. But Signor Odoardo hath promised with as much speed as possible he may to returne to Rome from Congo, whe­ther he sayled, presently after he had finished this trea­tise, which was in May 1589. with very ample infor­mations and further instructions, for the supplying of that which here wanteth touching Nilus, and his origi­nall, and such other matter. In the meane time, that little which is contayned in these few leaues, is not ve­ry little. But yet if perhaps there be any thing found therein, that may be eyther profitable, or straunge, or delightfull, or fit to passe away the time, and to driue away Melancholie, let it bee wholly ascribed to the right noble and Reuerend Father, my Lorde Antonie Migliore, Bishop of San Marco, and Commenda­dor of Santo Spirito, who was the authour of this worke to be published for the common benefit.

FINIS.
A TABLE OF THE CHAPTERS CON­tayned in the first Booke of The Report of the Kingdome of Congo.
  • THe iourney by Sea from Lisbone to the Kingdome of Congo. Chap. I. fol. 1.
  • Of the temperature of the ayre of the king­dome of Congo, and whether it bee very colde or hot: whether the men bee white or blacke: Whether are more or lesse blacke, they that dwell in the hilles, or those that dwell in the plaines: Of the winds and the raines, and the snowes in those quarters, and of what stature and semblaunce the men of that Countrey are. Chapter II. fol. 13.
  • Whether the children which are begotten by Portingalles being of a white skinne, and borne in those Countries by the women of Congo, be blacke or white, or tawney like a wilde Oliue, whom the Portingalles call Mu­lati. Chap. III. fol 18.
  • Of the circuite of the kingdome of Congo, and of the borders and confines thereof. And first of the Westerne Coast. Chap. IIII. fol. 20.
  • Of the North coast of the Kingdome of Congo, and the con­fines thereof. Chap. V. fol. 30.
  • Of the East coast of the Kingdome of Congo, and the Con­fines thereof. Chap. VI. fol. 38
  • Of the Confines of the Kingdome of Congo towardes the South. Chap. VII. fol. 43.
  • [Page]Of the circuite of the Kingdome of Congo possessed by the King that now is, according to the foure borders aboue described. Chap. VIII fol. 58.
  • The sixe Prouinces of the Kingdome of Congo, and first of the Prouince of Bamba. Chap. IX. fol. 60.
  • Of the Prouince of Sogno, which is the Countrey of the Riuer Zaire, and Loango. Chap. X. fol. 94.
  • Of the third Prouince ealled Sundi, Chap. XI. fol. 96.
  • Of the fourth Prouince called Pango. Chap. XII. fol. 99.
  • Of the fifth Prouince called Batta. Chap. XIII. fol. 100.
  • Of the sixt and last Prouince called Pemba. Chap. XIIII. fol. 104
A Table of the Chapters contayned in the seconde Booke.
  • OF the situation of the Royall Cittie of the King­dome of Congo. Chap. 1. fol. 107
  • Of the Originall beginning of Christendome in the Kingdome of Congo, and how the Por­tingalles obtayned this trafficke. Chap. II. fol. 118.
  • Don Iohn, the first Christian King being dead, Don Al­fonso his sonne succeeded. Of his warres against his bro­ther. Of certaine miracles that were wrought, and of the conuersion of those people. Chap. III. fol. 133.
  • The death of King Don Alfonso, and the succession of Don Piedro. How the Island of S. Thomas was first inhabi­ted, [Page] & of the Bishop that was sent thether. Other great ac­cidentes that happened by occasion of Religion. The death of two Kinges by the conspiracie of the Portingalles, and the Lords of Congo. How the Kings lineage was quite extinguished. The banishment of the Portingals. Chap. IIII. fol. 150.
  • The incursions of the people challed Giachas, in the King­dome of Congo. Their conditions and weapons. And the taking of the Royall Cittie. Chap. V. fol. 159.
  • The King of Portingall sendeth ayde, and an Embassadour to the King of Congo. The knowledge of the Mettall Mines, which abound in Congo is denyed the King of Portingall. At the same time the King of Congo di­spatcheth Embassadours to the King of Spaine, to request Priestes of him, and what befell vnto them. He sendeth diuers proofes of the mettalles. The vowe of Odoardo Lopes. Chap. VI. fol. 163
  • Of the Court of the King of Congo. Of the apparell of that people before they became Christians and after. Of the Kinges Table, and manner of his Court. Chap. VII. fol. 177
  • Of the Countries that are beyond the Kingdome of Congo to­wardes the Cape of Good-Hope▪ and of the Riuer Nilus. Chap. VIII. fol. 186
  • Of the Kingdome of Sofala. Chap. 19. fol. 192
  • The rest of the Coast of the Ocean the redde sea. Of the Em­pire of Prete Gianni, and the Confines thereof. Of the famous Riuer Nilus, and the originall spring thereof. Chap. X. fol. 215.
FINIS.

[Page]

[figure]

[Page]

[Page]

This keyboarded and encoded edition of the work described above is co-owned by the institutions providing financial support to the Text Creation Partnership. This Phase I text is available for reuse, according to the terms of Creative Commons 0 1.0 Universal. The text can be copied, modified, distributed and performed, even for commercial purposes, all without asking permission.